Mercedes Benz 2014 Glk Class Owners Manual ÿþy
2015-09-08
: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2014-Glk-Class-Owners-Manual-763418 mercedes-benz-2014-glk-class-owners-manual-763418 mercedes-benz pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 384
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
GLK-Class Operator's Manual Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Symbols Registered trademarks: i Practical tips or further information that RBluetooth® This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in X succession indicate an instruction with several steps. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or YY an instruction that is continued on the next page. Display This font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND display. is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. could be helpful to you. X Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company RMaintenance 2045844383 É2045844383ÌËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31 Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41 Opening and closing ........................... 75 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 111 Climate control ................................. 127 Driving and parking .......................... 143 On-board computer and displays .... 219 Stowage and features ...................... 273 Maintenance and care ...................... 299 Breakdown assistance ..................... 313 Wheels and tires ............................... 329 Technical data ................................... 365 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 115 V socket ...................................... 285 12 V socket see Sockets 360° camera Function/notes ............................. 197 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 236 Function/notes ................................ 67 Important safety notes .................... 67 Warning lamp ................................. 263 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 133 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 229 Display message ............................ 253 Function/information .................... 206 Trailer towing ................................. 209 Active Driving Assistance package . 206 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 229 Display message ............................ 252 Function/information .................... 209 Trailer towing ......................... 206, 212 Active light function ......................... 115 Active Parking Assist Canceling ....................................... 192 Detecting parking spaces .............. 189 Display message ............................ 253 Exiting a parking space .................. 191 Important safety notes .................. 188 Parking .......................................... 190 Towing a trailer .............................. 192 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 247 Function/notes ............................. 116 Switching on/off ................... 116, 117 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 231 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 372 Air bags Display message ............................ 242 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 46 Important safety notes .................... 44 Knee bag .......................................... 46 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 49 Pelvis air bag ................................... 48 Safety guidelines ............................. 43 Side impact air bag .......................... 47 Window curtain air bag .................... 48 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air filter (display message) .............. 250 AIR FLOW ........................................... 135 Air vents Glove box ....................................... 141 Important safety notes .................. 140 Rear ............................................... 141 Setting ........................................... 140 Setting the center air vents ........... 140 Setting the side air vents ............... 140 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Approach/departure angle .............. 173 Ashtray ............................................... 283 Assistance display (on-board computer) .......................................... 228 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .......................................... 228 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 300 Hiding a service message .............. 300 Notes ............................................. 300 Resetting the service interval display ........................................... 300 Service message ............................ 300 Special service requirements ......... 301 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 74 Function ........................................... 74 Switching off the alarm .................... 74 Index ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Audio menu (on-board computer) .......................................... Audio system see separate operating instructions Authorized Centers see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshops see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Automatic drive program ............... Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Display message ............................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position automatically ................................. Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Trailer towing ................................. Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ............................... 229 251 201 226 246 149 149 113 156 155 152 258 155 158 154 153 153 153 153 155 156 152 158 155 147 147 156 155 153 154 158 B Backup lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 122 Display message ............................ 245 Bag hook ............................................ 278 Ball coupling Installing ........................................ 214 Removing ....................................... 216 Storing ........................................... 217 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 68 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 78 Replacing ......................................... 79 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 318 Display message ............................ 249 Important safety notes .................. 316 Jump starting ................................. 320 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 229 Display message ............................ 253 Notes/function .............................. 202 Trailer towing ................................. 204 see Active Blind Spot Assist BlueTEC Adding DEF .................................... 162 BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 370 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 238 Notes ............................................. 372 Brake lamps Display message ............................ 244 Brakes ABS .................................................. 67 BAS .................................................. 68 BAS PLUS ........................................ 68 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 372 Display message ............................ 236 Driving tips .................................... 168 Important safety notes .................. 168 Maintenance .................................. 169 5 6 Index Parking brake ........................ 165, 169 Warning lamp ................................. 263 Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Replacing bulbs C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .................... 24 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Care Carpets .......................................... 312 Car wash ........................................ 306 Display ........................................... 310 Exterior lights ................................ 309 Gear or selector lever .................... 311 Interior ........................................... 310 Matte finish ................................... 308 Notes ............................................. 305 Paint .............................................. 307 Plastic trim .................................... 310 Power washer ................................ 307 Rear view camera .......................... 309 Roof lining ...................................... 312 Seat belt ........................................ 312 Seat cover ..................................... 311 Sensors ......................................... 309 Steering wheel ............................... 311 Tail pipes ....................................... 310 Trim pieces .................................... 311 Washing by hand ........................... 306 Wheels ........................................... 307 Windows ........................................ 308 Wiper blades .................................. 308 Wooden trim .................................. 311 Cargo compartment cover ............... 278 Cargo compartment enlargement ...................................... 276 Cargo compartment floor Opening/closing ............................ 281 Stowage well (under) ..................... 281 Cargo net Attaching ....................................... 280 Important safety information ......... 279 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 277 Car wash (care) ................................. 306 CD player/CD changer (on-board computer) .......................................... 226 Center console Lower section .................................. 37 Upper section .................................. 36 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 232 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76 Changing bulbs Cornering light function ................. 121 High-beam headlamps ................... 120 Low-beam headlamps .................... 120 Parking lamps ................................ 120 Reversing lamps ............................ 122 Standing lamps (front) ................... 120 Turn signals (front) ......................... 121 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 66 Rear doors ....................................... 66 Children In the vehicle ................................... 61 Restraint systems ............................ 61 Special seat belt retractor ............... 64 Child seat LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 64 Top Tether ....................................... 65 Cigarette lighter ................................ 284 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 309 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 310 Climate control Adjusting the airflow (AIR FLOW) ... 135 Automatic climate control (3-zone) 132 Controlling automatically ............... 135 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 133 Defrosting the windows ................. 138 Defrosting the windshield .............. 137 Dual-zone automatic climate control ........................................... 129 Important safety notes .................. 128 Indicator lamp ................................ 135 Index Maximum cooling .......................... 138 Notes on using automatic climate control ........................................... 133 Notes on using dual-zone automatic climate control .............. 130 Overview of systems ...................... 128 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 135 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 139 Rear control panel ......................... 132 Refrigerant ..................................... 374 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 374 Setting the air distribution ............. 136 Setting the airflow ......................... 137 Setting the air vents ...................... 140 Setting the temperature ................ 136 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 139 Switching on/off ........................... 133 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 139 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 138 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 137 Coat hooks ......................................... 280 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 see Instrument cluster Collapsible spare wheel Inflating ......................................... 362 see Emergency spare wheel COMAND see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 114 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 223 Convenience closing feature .............. 90 Convenience opening feature ............ 90 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 304 Display message ............................ 247 Filling capacity ............................... 373 Important safety notes .................. 372 Temperature gauge ........................ 220 Warning lamp ................................. 269 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 29 Cornering light function Changing bulbs .............................. 121 Display message ............................ 243 Function/notes ............................. 116 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ............................................... 119 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 174 Deactivating ................................... 175 Display message ............................ 255 Driving system ............................... 173 Function/notes ............................. 173 Important safety notes .................. 173 Setting a speed .............................. 175 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 174 Cup holder Center console .............................. 282 Important safety notes .................. 282 Rear compartment ......................... 282 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 27 Customer Relations Department ....... 27 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Dashboard lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 246 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 231 Switching on/off (switch) .............. 113 Dealerships see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity ................. 26 DEF Adding ........................................... 162 Display message ............................ 250 Filling capacity ............................... 371 Important safety notes .................. 370 7 8 Index Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ...................................... 231 Interior lighting .............................. 232 Diagnostics connection ...................... 26 Diesel .................................................. 370 Digital speedometer ......................... 224 DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 310 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 300 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 235 Driving systems ............................. 251 Engine ............................................ 247 General notes ................................ 235 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 235 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 260 Lights ............................................. 243 Safety systems .............................. 236 SmartKey ....................................... 260 Tires ............................................... 256 Vehicle ........................................... 258 Distance recorder ............................. 223 see Odometer see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 271 DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions ..................... 177 Deactivating ................................... 181 Display message ............................ 254 Displays in the multifunction display ........................................... 180 Driving tips .................................... 182 Function/notes ............................. 175 Important safety notes .................. 175 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 180 Warning lamp ................................. 271 Doors Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 232 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 76 Control panel ................................... 39 Display message ............................ 259 Emergency locking ........................... 83 Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 Important safety notes .................... 81 Opening (from inside) ...................... 81 Drinking and driving ......................... 166 Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive program Automatic ...................................... 156 Display ........................................... 153 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 153 Manual ........................................... 156 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 301 Symmetrical low beam .................. 112 Driving in mountainous terrain Approach/departure angle ............ 173 Driving lamps see Daytime running lamps Driving off-road see Off-road driving Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 67 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 68 Electronic brake force distribution ... 72 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) .................................... 69, 70 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 70 Important safety information ........... 67 Overview .......................................... 67 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72 Driving systems 360°camera .................................. 197 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 206 Active Driving Assistance package 206 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 209 Active Parking Assist ..................... 188 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 201 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 202 Cruise control ................................ 173 Display message ............................ 251 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 175 HOLD function ............................... 183 Index Lane Keeping Assist ...................... Lane Tracking package .................. PARKTRONIC ................................. Rear view camera .......................... Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... Break-in period .............................. DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Drinking and driving ....................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on sand .............................. Driving on wet roads ...................... Driving over obstacles ................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ................................... Off-road driving .............................. Off-road fording ............................. Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical low beam .................. Tire ruts ......................................... Towing a trailer .............................. Traveling uphill ............................... Wet road surface ........................... DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 204 202 185 192 155 168 144 182 168 166 112 170 170 172 170 172 166 166 166 170 171 168 172 170 333 112 172 212 173 168 226 227 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 233 Function/notes ............................. 105 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 106 Function/notes ............................. 105 Switching on/off ........................... 233 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 237 Function/notes ................................ 72 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 167 On-board computer ....................... 224 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 149 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 149 Deactivating/activating ................. 150 General information ....................... 148 Important safety notes .................. 148 Introduction ................................... 148 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 83 Vehicle ............................................. 83 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 362 Important safety notes .................. 361 Storage location ............................ 362 Stowing .......................................... 363 Technical data ............................... 364 Emergency Tensioning Devices Function ........................................... 60 Safety guidelines ............................. 43 Emergency unlocking Tailgate ............................................ 88 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 23 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 268 Display message ............................ 247 ECO start/stop function ................ 148 Engine number ............................... 367 Irregular running ............................ 151 Jump-starting ................................. 320 Starting problems .......................... 151 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 147 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 147 Switching off .................................. 164 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 325 Engine, jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 151 9 10 Index Engine oil Adding ........................................... 303 Additives ........................................ 372 Checking the oil level ..................... 302 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 303 Display message ............................ 249 Filling capacity ............................... 372 Notes about oil grades ................... 371 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 302 Viscosity ........................................ 372 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Deactivating/activating ................... 70 Display message ............................ 236 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 70 Function/notes ......................... 69, 70 Important safety information ........... 70 Trailer stabilization ........................... 71 Warning lamp ................................. 265 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ................................................ 70 Exhaust check ................................... 166 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 310 Exterior lighting Setting options .............................. 112 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 106 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 107 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 107 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 234 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 107 Setting ........................................... 107 Storing settings (memory function) 109 Storing the parking position .......... 108 F Filler cap see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... 314 Flat tire MOExtended run-flat system ......... 315 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 314 see Emergency spare wheel Floormats ........................................... 298 Fog lamps Switching on/off ........................... 113 Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back .................................. 276 Fording Off-road ......................................... 170 On flooded roads ........................... 170 Front fog lamps Display message ............................ 245 Switching on/off ........................... 113 Fuel Additives ........................................ 369 Consumption statistics .................. 223 Displaying the current consumption .................................. 224 Displaying the range ...................... 224 Driving tips .................................... 166 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 369 Important safety notes .................. 368 Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 369 Problem (malfunction) ................... 161 Quality (diesel) ............................... 370 Refueling ........................................ 158 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 368 Fuel filler flap Opening/closing ............................ 159 Fuel filter (display message) ............ 250 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 224 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 368 Problem (malfunction) ................... 161 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 314 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 325 Before changing ............................. 325 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 325 Fuse box in the cargo compartment ................................. 326 Index Fuse box in the engine compartment ................................. 326 Important safety notes .................. 325 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 298 Important safety notes .................. 295 Opening/closing the garage door .. 297 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 296 Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 311 Genuine parts ...................................... 22 Glove box ........................................... 275 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) ......................................... 352 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... Headlamps Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... Cleaning system (function) ............ Cleaning system (notes) ................ Fogging up ..................................... see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... Adjusting (electrically) ................... Adjusting (manually) ...................... Adjusting (rear) .............................. Installing/removing (rear) .............. see NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Heating see Climate control High-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. Display message ............................ Switching on/off ........................... Hill start assist .................................. 115 305 115 373 117 101 101 101 102 102 120 245 115 148 HOLD function Deactivating ................................... Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Hood Closing ........................................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Opening ......................................... Hydroplaning ..................................... 184 251 183 302 259 301 302 170 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 73 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 33 Settings ......................................... 230 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 231 Interior lighting ................................. 118 Automatic control .......................... 118 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 232 Emergency lighting ........................ 119 Manual control ............................... 118 Overview ........................................ 118 Reading lamp ................................. 118 Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) ...................................... 231 J Jack Storage location ............................ 314 Using ............................................. 356 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 320 K KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 91 Display message ............................ 260 Locking ............................................ 77 Start/Stop button .......................... 145 11 12 Index Starting the engine ........................ 147 Unlocking ......................................... 77 Key positions KEYLESS-GO .................................. 145 SmartKey ....................................... 145 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 155 Knee bag .............................................. 46 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 229 Display message ............................ 252 Function/information .................... 204 Lane Tracking package ..................... 202 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 64 License plate lamp (display message) ............................................ 245 Light function, active Display message ............................ 246 Lighting Light switch ................................... 112 Lights Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off . 232 Active light function ....................... 115 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 113 Cornering light function ................. 116 Display message ............................ 243 Driving abroad ............................... 112 Fog lamps ...................................... 113 Hazard warning lamps ................... 115 High beam flasher .......................... 115 High-beam headlamps ................... 115 Low-beam headlamps .................... 113 Parking lamps ................................ 114 Rear fog lamp ................................ 114 Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) ...................................... 231 Standing lamps .............................. 114 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. 231 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) 231 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (switch) .................... 113 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 231 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 231 Turn signals ................................... 114 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs Light sensor (display message) ....... 246 Loading guidelines ............................ 274 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 82 Emergency locking ........................... 83 From inside (central locking button) ............................................. 82 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 233 Low-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Display message ............................ 243 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ................................. 112 Switching on/off ........................... 113 Lumbar support Adjusting ....................................... 102 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .......................................... 103 M M+S tires ............................................ Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) mbrace Call priority .................................... Display message ............................ Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... Downloading routes ....................... 332 308 291 238 291 294 Index Emergency call .............................. 288 General notes ................................ 287 Geo fencing ................................... 295 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 293 MB info call button ........................ 290 Remote vehicle locking .................. 292 Roadside Assistance button .......... 290 Search & Send ............................... 292 Self-test ......................................... 288 Speed alert .................................... 294 System .......................................... 288 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 295 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis ....................................... 293 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 292 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 78 Locking vehicle ................................ 83 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83 Memory card (audio) ......................... 226 Memory function ............................... 109 Message memory (on-board computer) .......................................... 235 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Menu (on-board computer) ............ 227 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 77 MOExtended run-flat system ........... 315 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 358 Mounting a new wheel ................... 357 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 355 Raising the vehicle ......................... 356 Removing a wheel .......................... 357 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ................................... 355 MP3 Operation ....................................... 226 see separate operating instructions Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 222 Permanent display ......................... 231 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 221 Overview .......................................... 35 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 225 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 54 Resetting after being triggered ........ 55 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operation ......................................... 54 Resetting after being triggered ........ 55 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 144 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Faults ............................................... 53 Operation ......................................... 49 System self-test ............................... 52 Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 61 System overview .............................. 42 OCS Faults ............................................... 53 Operation ......................................... 49 System self-test ............................... 52 Odometer ........................................... 223 Off-road driving Approach/departure angle ............ 376 Checklist after driving off-road ...... 172 Checklist before driving off-road .... 172 Fording depth ................................ 375 General information ....................... 172 Important safety notes .................. 171 Maximum gradient climbing ability 376 Traveling uphill ............................... 173 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Assistance menu ........................... 228 Audio menu ................................... 226 Convenience submenu .................. 233 Displaying a service message ........ 300 13 14 Index Display messages .......................... 235 Factory settings submenu ............. 234 Important safety notes .................. 220 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 230 Lighting submenu .......................... 231 Menu overview .............................. 223 Message memory .......................... 235 Navigation menu ............................ 225 Operation ....................................... 221 Service menu ................................. 230 Settings menu ............................... 230 Standard display ............................ 223 Telephone menu ............................ 227 Trip menu ...................................... 223 Vehicle submenu ........................... 232 Video DVD operation ..................... 227 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 121 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety notes .................... 25 Operating system see On-board computer Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ........................... 23 Outside temperature display ........... 221 Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 66 P Paint code number ............................ 366 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 307 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Opening/closing .............................. 93 Opening/closing the roller sunblind ........................................... 94 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95 Resetting ......................................... 94 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................... 92 Parking ............................................... 164 Important safety notes .................. 164 Parking brake ................................ 165 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 108 Rear view camera .......................... 192 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 188 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 237 Notes/function .............................. 165 Parking lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Switching on/off ........................... 114 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 187 Driving system ............................... 185 Function/notes ............................. 185 Important safety notes .................. 185 Problem (malfunction) ................... 188 Range of the sensors ..................... 185 Trailer towing ................................. 187 Warning display ............................. 186 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Problem (malfunction) ..................... 53 Problems (malfunction) .................. 242 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ...................................................... 49 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 310 Power washers .................................. 307 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 238 Operation ......................................... 54 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 229 Display message ............................ 239 Function/notes ................................ 72 Warning lamp ................................. 271 Program selector button .................. 155 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 22 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 147 Index Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 R Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 233 Display message ............................ 251 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 226 see separate operating instructions Radio-wave reception/ transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Reading lamp ..................................... 118 Rear compartment Setting the airflow ......................... 137 Setting the air vents ...................... 141 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 245 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 309 Function/notes ............................. 192 Switching on/off ........................... 193 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 106 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 139 Switching on/off ........................... 138 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade .............. 124 Switching on/off ........................... 123 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 374 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 158 Refueling process .......................... 159 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 295 Programming (garage door opener) 296 Replacing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 119 Overview of bulb types .................. 119 Reporting safety defects .................... 27 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 249 Warning lamp ................................. 268 see Fuel Residual heat (climate control) ........ 139 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93 Roller sunblinds ............................... 94 Side windows ................................... 89 Tailgate ............................................ 84 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24 Roller blind see Roller sunblind Roller sunblind Opening/closing .............................. 94 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ..................................... 93 Roof carrier ........................................ 281 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 312 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 375 Route (navigation) see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 225 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... Child restraint systems .................... Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... Overview of occupant safety systems ........................................... Safety system see Driving safety systems 61 61 49 42 15 16 Index Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 58 Adjusting the height ......................... 58 Belt force limiters ............................ 60 center rear-compartment seat ......... 59 Cleaning ......................................... 312 Correct usage .................................. 56 Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 60 Fastening ......................................... 58 Important safety guidelines ............. 56 Releasing ......................................... 59 Safety guidelines ............................. 43 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 233 Warning lamp ................................. 261 Warning lamp (function) ................... 59 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100 Adjusting lumbar support .............. 102 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .......................................... 103 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 101 Cleaning the cover ......................... 311 Correct driver's seat position ........... 98 Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back ....... 276 Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back ............................... 276 Important safety notes .................... 99 Seat heating problem .................... 104 Storing settings (memory function) 109 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 103 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 309 Service menu (on-board computer) . 230 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 372 Coolant (engine) ............................ 372 DEF special additives ..................... 370 Engine oil ....................................... 371 Fuel ................................................ 367 Important safety notes .................. 367 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) .......................................... 374 Washer fluid ................................... 373 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 234 On-board computer ....................... 230 Setting the air distribution ............... 136 Setting the airflow ............................ 137 Side impact air bag ............................. 47 Side marker lamp (display message) ............................................ 245 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 308 Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Convenience opening feature .......... 90 Important safety information ........... 88 Opening/closing .............................. 89 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92 Resetting ......................................... 91 Sliding sunroof see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 79 Changing the programming ............. 77 Checking the battery ....................... 79 Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Convenience opening feature .......... 90 Display message ............................ 260 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76 Important safety notes .................... 76 Loss ................................................. 80 Mechanical key ................................ 78 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 145 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80 Starting the engine ........................ 147 Snow chains ...................................... 333 Sockets Center console .............................. 284 General notes ................................ 284 Rear compartment ......................... 285 Spare wheel Storage location ............................ 362 Stowing .......................................... 363 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Special seat belt retractor .................. 64 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Digital ............................................ 224 In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Segments ...................................... 221 Selecting the unit of measurement 230 see Instrument cluster Index SRS see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 239 Introduction ..................................... 43 Warning lamp ................................. 267 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Standing lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 120 Display message ............................ 245 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 146 Steering (display message) .............. 259 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104 Button overview ............................... 35 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 221 Cleaning ......................................... 311 Important safety notes .................. 104 Paddle shifters ............................... 156 Storing settings (memory function) 109 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 156 Stowage areas ................................... 275 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 275 Cup holders ................................... 282 Glove box ....................................... 275 Important safety information ......... 275 Rear ............................................... 276 Stowage net ................................... 276 Stowage net ....................................... 276 Summer opening see Convenience opening feature Summer tires ..................................... 332 Sun visor ............................................ 282 Surround lighting (on-board computer) .......................................... 231 SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 25 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 139 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 74 T Tachometer ........................................ 220 Tailgate Display message ............................ 258 Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 Important safety notes .................... 84 Limiting the opening angle ............... 87 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 87 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 85 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 85 Opening dimensions ...................... 375 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 244 Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 367 Emergency spare wheel ................. 364 Information .................................... 366 Tires/wheels ................................. 359 Trailer loads ................................... 376 Vehicle data ................................... 375 TELEAID Call priority .................................... 291 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 291 Downloading routes ....................... 294 Emergency call .............................. 288 Geo fencing ................................... 295 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 293 MB info call button ........................ 290 Remote vehicle locking .................. 292 Roadside Assistance button .......... 290 Search & Send ............................... 292 Self-test ......................................... 288 Speed alert .................................... 294 System .......................................... 288 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 295 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis ....................................... 293 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 292 Tele Aid General notes ................................ 287 17 18 Index Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 227 Display message ............................ 259 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 227 Number from the phone book ........ 228 Redialing ........................................ 228 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 227 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 220 Outside temperature ...................... 221 Setting (climate control) ................ 136 Theft deterrent systems ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74 Immobilizer ...................................... 73 Time see separate operating instructions Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 338 Checking manually ........................ 337 Display message ............................ 256 Important safety notes .................. 338 Maximum ....................................... 336 Notes ............................................. 335 Pressure loss warning .................... 337 Recommended ............................... 334 Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ 337 Important safety notes .................. 337 Restarting ...................................... 338 Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure electronically ................................. 340 Function/notes ............................. 338 General notes ................................ 338 Important safety notes .................. 339 Restarting ...................................... 341 Warning lamp ................................. 272 Warning message .......................... 341 Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 353 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 351 Bar (definition) ............................... 351 Changing a wheel .......................... 354 Characteristics .............................. 351 Checking ........................................ 331 Definition of terms ......................... 351 Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ..................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) ......................... Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... M+S tires ....................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ....................... Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... MOExtended tires .......................... Optional equipment weight (definition) ..................................... PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ..................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Sidewall (definition) ....................... Speed rating (definition) ................ Storing ........................................... Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... Summer tires ................................. Temperature .................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 354 256 354 350 351 352 352 352 352 330 351 352 347 353 350 352 332 352 353 352 345 352 315 353 353 354 332 353 352 355 351 332 347 353 Index Tire bead (definition) ...................... 353 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 353 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 351 Tire size (data) ............................... 359 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 348 Tire tread ....................................... 331 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 353 Total load limit (definition) ............. 354 Traction ......................................... 346 Traction (definition) ....................... 353 Tread wear ..................................... 346 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar noseweight) (definition) ................. 353 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 346 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 351 Unladen weight (definition) ............ 352 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 354 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 351 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 65 Towing Important safety guidelines ........... 322 Installing the towing eye ................ 323 Removing the towing eye ............... 323 With the rear axle raised ................ 324 Towing a trailer Active Parking Assist ..................... 192 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 310 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 214 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 216 Driving tips .................................... 212 Important safety notes .................. 212 Installing the ball coupling ............. 214 Lights display message .................. 243 Mounting dimensions .................... 376 Power supply ................................. 217 Removing the ball coupling ............ 216 Storing the ball coupling ................ 217 Trailer loads ................................... 376 Towing away With both axles on the ground ....... 324 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 325 Important safety notes .................. 322 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer loads and drawbar noseweights ...................................... 216 Trailer towing Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 209 Active Lane Keeping Assist .... 206, 212 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 204 PARKTRONIC ................................. 187 Permissible trailer loads and drawbar noseweights ..................... 216 Transfer case ..................................... 158 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 153 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 153 Transporting the vehicle .................. 324 Traveling uphill Brow of hill ..................................... 173 Driving downhill ............................. 173 Maximum gradient-climbing capability ....................................... 173 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 311 Trip computer (on-board computer) 223 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 223 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 224 Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... 121 Display message ............................ 244 Switching on/off ........................... 114 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (definition) ......................................... 353 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 82 19 20 Index V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 283 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 27 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 258 Emergency locking ........................... 83 Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 Equipment ....................................... 23 Individual settings .......................... 230 Limited Warranty ............................. 28 Loading .......................................... 342 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76 Lowering ........................................ 358 Maintenance .................................... 24 Parking for a long period ................ 165 Pulling away ................................... 147 Raising ........................................... 356 Reporting problems ......................... 27 Securing from rolling away ............ 355 Towing away .................................. 322 Transporting .................................. 324 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76 Vehicle data ................................... 375 Vehicle data ....................................... 375 Vehicle data (off-road driving) Approach/departure angle ............ 376 Fording depth ................................ 375 Maximum gradient climbing ability 376 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 375 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 366 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 314 Video (DVD) ........................................ 227 VIN ...................................................... 366 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ Brakes ........................................... Check Engine ................................. Coolant .......................................... 263 263 268 269 Distance warning ........................... 271 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 271 ESP® .............................................. 265 ESP® OFF ....................................... 266 Fuel tank ........................................ 268 Overview .......................................... 34 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 49 Reserve fuel ................................... 268 Seat belt ........................................ 261 SRS ................................................ 267 Tire pressure monitor .................... 272 Warranty ............................................ 366 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 259 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 358 Wheel chock ...................................... 355 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 354 Checking ........................................ 331 Cleaning ......................................... 307 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 355 Emergency spare wheel ................. 361 Important safety notes .................. 330 Interchanging/changing ................ 354 Mounting a new wheel ................... 357 Mounting a wheel .......................... 355 Removing a wheel .......................... 357 Storing ........................................... 355 Tightening torque ........................... 358 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 359 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 240 Operation ......................................... 48 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 137 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system .............. 305 Notes ............................................. 373 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 126 Rear window wiper ........................ 123 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 123 Switching on/off ........................... 122 Index Winter driving Important safety notes .................. Slippery road surfaces ................... Snow chains .................................. Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing (rear window) ................ Replacing (windshield) ................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) Workshops see Qualified specialist workshop 332 171 333 332 308 123 124 124 311 Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 137 21 22 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rkeep Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Rdoor Introduction Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safetyrelevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 366) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Service and literature Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) REmission Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. Z 23 24 Introduction Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. Introduction If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Sports Utility Vehicle G WARNING Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/ maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other Z 25 26 Introduction networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis. In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system for an extended period, they can catch fire. Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Ryou Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Introduction Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Technical Data section in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Rservice Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Z 27 28 Introduction If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Data stored in the vehicle Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data. If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of an accident. This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety. Daimler AG can access these data and submit them: Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner Ron the instruction of prosecuting authorities Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or its sales and service organizations Ras otherwise required or permitted by law Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE AID) purchase agreement to find out more about data that can be recorded and transmitted by this system. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, Introduction other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, who have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource Z 29 30 Dashboard ........................................... Instrument cluster .............................. Multifunction steering wheel ............. Center console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 32 33 35 36 38 39 At a glance 31 32 Dashboard At a glance Dashboard Function Page Steering wheel paddle shifters 156 ; Combination switch 114 = Instrument cluster 33 ? Horn A PARKTRONIC warning display B Overhead control panel C Operating the climate control systems 128 Ignition lock Start/Stop button 145 145 : D Function Page Adjusting the steering wheel manually 104 Adjusting the steering wheel electrically 104 G Cruise control lever 174 H Parking brake 165 185 I Diagnostics connection 38 J Opening the hood 302 K Releasing the parking brake 165 L Light switch 112 E F 26 Instrument cluster 33 Instrument cluster Function At a glance Displays and controls Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature 220 = Speedometer with segments 221 i Adjust the instrument cluster lighting using the on-board computer (Y page 231). Function Page ? Multifunction display 222 A Tachometer 220 34 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function ESP® Page : ÷ ; · Distance warning 271 = å ESP® OFF 265 ? $ Brakes (USA only) 263 A J Brakes (Canada only) 263 B #! Turn signals 114 C ! ABS 263 D 6 SRS 267 E ; Check Engine 268 F h Tire pressure monitor 272 G ü Seat belt 261 265 Function Page % Diesel engine: preglow 147 I ? Coolant 269 J K High-beam headlamps 115 L Low-beam headlamps 113 L T Parking lamps 114 M R Rear fog lamp 114 N N Front fog lamps 113 O 8 Reserve fuel 268 H K Multifunction steering wheel 35 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio/COMAND display; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 222 Function A B 227 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms your selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions Page 221 221 221 235 221 36 Center console At a glance Center console Center console, upper section Function : £ Hazard warning lamps Page 115 ; ATA indicator lamp 74 = 45 Indicator lamp 49 ESP® ? å A COMAND; see the separate operating instructions 70 Function Page B c Seat heating 103 C ¤ ECO start/stop function 148 c PARKTRONIC 185 D Center console 37 At a glance Center console, lower section Function : ; Page Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket 275 283 284 284 Cup holder 282 Function = Stowage compartment ? Audio/COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions Page 275 Overhead control panel 38 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : ; = ? A B 1 u Switches the rearcompartment interior lighting on/off Page 118 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 118 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 118 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel with roller sunblinds 93 ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) 290 G SOS button (mbrace system) 288 Function Page C Rear-view mirror 106 D Buttons for the garage door opener 297 E Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System1 F F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 290 p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 118 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 118 G H The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instructions. Door control panel 39 At a glance Door control panel Function : Opens the door ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle = ? A B C Adjusts the seats electrically Page 81 82 100 r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 109 Z Selects the left exterior mirror 106 Function D E F G H ö Folds the exterior mirrors in/out 107 \ Selects the right exterior mirror 106 7 Adjusts the exterior mirrors Page 106 W Opens/closes the front side windows 89 W Opens/closes the rear side windows 89 n Activates/ deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 66 q Opens/closes the tailgate 87 40 Useful information .............................. Panic alarm .......................................... Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Driving safety systems ....................... Theft deterrent locking system ......... 42 42 42 61 67 73 Safety 41 Occupant safety 42 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all Safety models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Occupant safety Overview of occupant safety In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle. The restraint system consists of: Rseat belts restraint systems RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors Additional protection is provided by: Rchild RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Rair bag system components with: - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp - front-passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) The different air bag systems work independently of each other. The protective functions of the system work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are always deployed in an accident. RNECK-PRO Panic alarm G WARNING X To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint system components or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software. i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61). Occupant safety Introduction SRS consists of: RThe 6 SRS warning lamp bags RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors) REmergency Tensioning Devices RBelt force limiters SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. RAir SRS warning lamp G WARNING If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have SRS checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp goes out while the engine is running. There is a malfunction if: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags G WARNING RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced. RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. RDo not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts. RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. RNo modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. RDo not change or remove any component or part of the SRS. RDo not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag Z Safety SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) 43 Safety 44 Occupant safety cover, outer sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims. RDo not install additional electrical/ electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. RKeep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). RDo not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may be thrown around in the vehicle and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed. RAir bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. RNever place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RFor your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RGiven the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment. If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual. Air bags Important safety notes G WARNING Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the air bag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the deployed air bags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: Rfrontal impacts (driver's and frontpassenger front air bags and driver's knee bag) Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags and pelvis air bags) Rrollover (window curtain air bags) However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder is released. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G WARNING In order to reduce the potential danger of injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger must always be correctly seated and wear their seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is correctly positioned on your body. As the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it inflates with great force instantaneously: Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the backrest. Rmove the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag inflates. Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. Roccupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious or fatal injuries should the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual. The air bag installation locations are identified by the AIR BAG symbol. The air bags are deployed if the air bag control unit detects the need for deployment. Only in the event of such a situation will the air bags provide their supplemental protection. If the driver and front passenger do not wear their seat belts, it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection. In the event of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. Z 45 Safety Occupant safety 46 Occupant safety i After an air bag has been deployed, have Safety the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is ready to drive. Front air bags The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front passenger's head and chest. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. They are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of other air bags in the vehicle The release time of the front air bags is dependent upon the use of the seat belt. If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are generally not deployed. If the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front air bags are deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The deployment of front-passenger front air bag ; is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (Y page 49). The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required (predicted at the start of the impact) for second stage inflation of the front-passenger front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum amount of propellant gas available. The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The front-passenger front air bag will only be deployed if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console is not lit (Y page 49) Rthe air bag control unit predicts a highimpact severity Driver's knee bag Driver's knee bag : increases the driver's protection against: Rknee injuries injuries Rlower leg injuries Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. If, during a frontal collision, the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, driver's knee bag : is deployed along with the driver's air bag. Driver's knee bag : operates best in conjunction with correctly positioned and fastened seat belts. Rthigh Side impact air bags You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, the side impact air bags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. When deployed, the side impact air bags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms G WARNING Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the air bag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Side impact air bags : deploy next to the outer seat cushions. Side impact air bags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of the ETDs If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air bags are generally not deployed. Side impact air bags are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that side impact air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Rat Z 47 Safety Occupant safety Safety 48 Occupant safety Side impact air bags : will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side is not deployed in the following situations: ROCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied. front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side will deploy if the frontpassenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Rthe Pelvis air bags G WARNING Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat coverings can cause a malfunction of the side impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions. They are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of the ETDs If the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis air bags are generally not deployed. Exception: if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in the following situations: Rat ROCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied. front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not. Rthe Window curtain air bags The window curtain air bags enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The window curtain air bags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Occupant safety 49 The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag pelvis air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet on the floor The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by leaning on the armrest. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag display messages that can be displayed in the instrument cluster (Y page 242). Rin Window curtain air bags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rif the vehicle rolls over and the system determines that window curtain air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of the front air bags Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in the event of impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. Rat Occupant Classification System (OCS) How the Occupant Classification System works The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the frontpassenger seat using a weight sensor. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated automatically for certain weight categories. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows you the current status. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the passenger air bag is disabled. G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front-passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the 45 indicator lamp goes out. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front-passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front-passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty. Z Safety Rthe Safety 50 Occupant safety When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the frontpassenger seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the 45 indicator lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag is activated. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. If the 45 indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed: Rin the event of certain frontal impacts impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold Rindependently of the side impact air bags If the front-passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by: Rif Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit Rthe front passenger's weight category as identified by OCS G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat: RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the Occupant safety RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat: - move the seat as far back as possible - use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child - secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions RFor children larger than the typical 12month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag may or may not be activated. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The OCS may have detected that the seat: Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a typical child up to twelve months old, seated in a child restraint system. Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a young teenager or a small adult. Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint system whose weight is greater than that of a typical twelve month old child. These are examples of when the OCS deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the driver's air bag. If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up. Z Safety front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat. RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 45 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 45 indicator lamp while driving to make sure that the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 45 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates. 51 52 Occupant safety Safety G WARNING If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the 45 indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS: RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest. RWhen seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category. RRead and observe all warnings in this chapter. System self-test The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up if you: the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock Rpress the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESSGO. When an adult is sitting correctly on the frontpassenger seat and is categorized by the OCS system as an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and goes off again after approximately six seconds. If the seat is not occupied and the OCS system classifies the front-passenger seat as being empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will continue to light up and not go out. Rturn G WARNING If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 53). G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the OCS. This could result in the front-passenger front air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. Make sure that the bottom and back of the child restraint system make full contact with the front-passenger seat cushion and backrest. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant safety 53 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lights up and remains on. The person on the front-passenger seat: The OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright position. X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (Y page 242). Rhas the weight of a typical adult Rhas been determined by the system not to be a child G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or stays on. The front-passenger seat is: The OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat. X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint system are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Runoccupied X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the Roccupied with a seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the frontpassenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt weight up to that of a being pulled too tightly. typical twelvemonth-old child in a X Check the installation of the child restraint system. standard child X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto restraint system the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the OCS has been repaired. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (Y page 242). Z Safety Problems with the Occupant Classification System Occupant safety 54 G WARNING Safety If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) G WARNING The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as their seat belts have been fastened correctly. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRESAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You should therefore always drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely If the seat belts are not released: X When the vehicle is stationary, move the backrest or seat back slightly. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you adjust the seat. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. More information about seat belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRESAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt adjustment" section (Y page 58). NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example Ruse head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and do not use head restraint covers. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints increase protection of the driver's and front-passenger's head and neck. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and the front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 55). Otherwise, the additional Occupant safety Safety protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. X G WARNING For reasons of safety, have the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end collision. Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. G WARNING NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes When pushing back the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to observe this could result in injuries. 55 i If you have difficulty resetting the NECKPRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. NECK-PRO head restraints i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head Z Safety 56 Occupant safety restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet. Seat belts Important safety notes The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened when the vehicle is in motion. Rthe i See "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the upright position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in the upright position. G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the belt anchorage has been modified. Damage caused to seat belts in an accident may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. Rthe i See "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems. Correct use of the seat belts G WARNING USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY RSeat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident. REach occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee bag, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window curtain air bags for the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs). RNever wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the seat belt outlet. RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries. RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. RNever use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects at the same time. RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the seat belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries. RPregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible. RCheck your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. RNever place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. G WARNING Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts. Z 57 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety 58 Fastening seat belts Safety G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 58). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. For further information on special seat belt retractors, see (Y page 64). For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 59). Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a retraction force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 233). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found in the "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system)" section (Y page 54). X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 98). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat. Occupant safety 59 Safety Releasing seat belts Adjust the height so that the upper part of the seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :. X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Release belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. Using the rear center seat belt If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear center seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear center seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. X X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. Guide belt tongue ; to belt sash guide :. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger Regardless of whether the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts have already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have already fastened their seat belts. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after a maximum of six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. Z 60 Occupant safety Safety If after six seconds the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belts and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up: Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat belt is fastened Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is exceeded, a warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger seat belt has been fastened. If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds again. The warning tone ceases even if the driver or front-passenger seat belt has still not been fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated. After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes out if: Rboth the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. or Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 261). Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency Tensioning Device could be triggered in the event of an accident. i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: Emergency Tensioning Devices that are triggered by an electric motor can be deployed as often as desired and do not need to be replaced. The seat belts for the front seats and rear outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat belt force limiters. The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. The ETDs can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp "(Y page 43) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the front-passenger side The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident, if: Rthe Rin certain situations where the vehicle rolls over and the system determines that it can provide additional protection Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision, the vehicle decelerates or Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always properly secure all infants and children with a child or infant seat restraint system for the trip. The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe Rthe District of Columbia Canadian provinces Infants and children must always be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All infant or child restraint systems must meet the following standards: Rall RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat. Observe all warning signs in the vehicle interior and on the infant or child restraint. G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant Z Safety accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rin the event of a side impact, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction on the side opposite the impact If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This results in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area. 61 62 Children in the vehicle Safety restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat: RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat. RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated. Always make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. RIf you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 4 5 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 4 5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 4 5 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates. RIf you have to place a child in a forwardfacing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint Children in the vehicle G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. G WARNING Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/ shoulder belt fits properly without a booster seat. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Z Safety system manufacturer's installation instructions. 63 Children in the vehicle 64 If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle: Safety X Secure the child with a child or infant seat restraint system appropriate to the age and weight of the child. X Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Special seat belt retractor All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt retractor. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat belt retractor retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated. X Push down on the child restraint system to take up any slack. Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. G WARNING Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear G WARNING Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. Install the child restraint system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Attach the child restraint system to both securing rings. An incorrectly installed child restraint system could come loose during an accident and seriously or even fatally injure the child. Child restraint systems or child seat securing rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as the result of a collision must be replaced. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems using the vehicle's seat belt system. When installing child restraint systems, you must observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged. 65 Safety Children in the vehicle Installation instructions : indicate the installation location of securing rings 2. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system. Top Tether G WARNING Always lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position when the rear seats are occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position before installing the Top Tether straps or when the cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure that rear seat backrests are secured properly by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the seat backrest could fold forward. The child restraint system is no longer supported properly or held in position and can no longer fulfill its function. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount, and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorages are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests. X Move head restraint : upwards. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Guide Top Tether belt A downwards between cargo compartment cover ; and rear seat backrest. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that: RTop Tether hook ? is hooked into Top Tether anchorage = as shown. RTop Tether belt A is not twisted. RTop Tether belt A is routed between the rear seat backrest and cargo Z Safety 66 Children in the vehicle compartment cover ; if cargo compartment cover ; is installed. RTop Tether belt A is routed between the rear seat backrest and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 102). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. Child-proof locks for the rear doors G WARNING Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the rear doors with the child-proof locks. You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows G WARNING When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, activate the override switch. Otherwise, the children could be injured, e.g. by trapping themselves in the rear side window. Driving safety systems 67 conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 330). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: (Anti-lock Braking System) (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) RPRE-SAFE® Brake RABS RBAS ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). G WARNING Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information Z Safety i The driving safety systems described only Driving safety systems Safety 68 on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 263) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 236). ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently. Braking X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist System) General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot BAS PLUS does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rinterference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. RBAS 69 When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. Safety G WARNING Driving safety systems i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if: Ryou release the brake pedal is no longer a risk of collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Rthere ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. Z 70 Driving safety systems ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" Safety section (Y page 67). ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! When testing the electric parking brake on a braking dynamometer, switch off the ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 324) when towing the vehicle with a raised rear axle. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 265) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 236). i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP General information If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). You can select between the following statuses of ESP: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® X To switch off: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch on: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine ESP® trailer stabilization G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. In this situation, ESP® assists you and can detect if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized. Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 40 mph (65 km/h). Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction. Z 71 Safety Driving safety systems 72 Driving safety systems EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Safety General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 263) as well as display messages (Y page 237). PRE-SAFE® Brake General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRESAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Theft deterrent locking system Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rinterference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. i If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated. Function If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: X Rdepressing To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the onboard computer (Y page 229). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened the accelerator pedal further. kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ractivating Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere Theft deterrent locking system Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. Z Safety In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: 73 Theft deterrent locking system 74 Safety X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: door vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe tailgate Rthe hood The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. X Ra Rthe or X Press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. To stop the alarm using the SmartKey: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. 75 76 76 81 84 88 92 Opening and closing Useful information .............................. SmartKey ............................................. Doors .................................................... Cargo compartment ............................ Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 76 SmartKey Useful information Opening and closing i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil - inside metallic objects e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. - SmartKey functions The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe : & To lock the vehicle ; F To open/close the tailgate = % To unlock the vehicle The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 231). You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 233). X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens: Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 91). If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door Z 77 Opening and closing SmartKey SmartKey Opening and closing 78 and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 79) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 74). X To end the alarm: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. i With KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock beforehand. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. Removing the mechanical key The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles (Y page 77). X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or the KEYLESSGO key, use the mechanical key. X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. SmartKey battery Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. SmartKey X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. If battery check lamp : does not light up briefly during the test, the battery is discharged. i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks X the vehicle Change the battery (Y page 79). i You can get a battery at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 78). X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. Z Opening and closing Checking the battery 79 80 SmartKey Problems with the SmartKey Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. Opening and closing Problem If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary (Y page 79). X Lock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the mechanical key. The SmartKey is faulty. X Lock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been or unlock the vehicle unlocked for a long time. using KEYLESS-GO. X Pull the door handle and then turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary (Y page 79). X Lock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the mechanical key. You have lost a SmartKey. X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have lost the mechanical key. X The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 316). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 320). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as started using KEYLESS- easily. GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274). Rshifting Unlocking and opening doors from the inside You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they Z Opening and closing X 81 Doors Opening and closing 82 are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 66). Only open the door when the traffic situation permits. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). X To unlock: press button :. X To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. X To unlock a front door: pull door handle ;. Locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a front door: pull door handle ;. X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking knob :. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. Only open the door when the traffic situation permits. If the vehicle was previously locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the vehicle from the inside will activate the antitheft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside: Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked Ronly the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked If the vehicle has been locked centrally with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is not unlocked when the release button for the central locking is used. Automatic locking feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle's wheels are turning at a speed in excess of 9 mph (15 km/h). Doors 83 You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X X To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 232). Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 74). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 78). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 82). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 81). X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 78). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Z Opening and closing Rthe Cargo compartment 84 that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions Opening and closing (Y page 375). X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not armed. Cargo compartment Important safety notes G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274). Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tailgate: the tailgate can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside from inside with the mechanical Runlocked key For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate you can: Ropen and close the tailgate manually from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from inside Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate Runlock the tailgate from inside with the mechanical key Tailgate reversing feature The tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the tailgate during the closing procedure. The tailgate opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is however only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness when closing the cargo compartment. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement Cargo compartment Closing Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver’s door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate, or Rpull the handle on the tailgate X Pull the tailgate down using recess :. Push the tailgate closed from outside the vehicle. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey (Y page 76) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 77). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock. X Opening/closing from outside Opening X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING X Pull handle :. X Raise the tailgate. Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if you pull handle : and keep it in this position, you can open the tailgate manually. If you release the handle, the tailgate opens automatically. Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Z Opening and closing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: 85 Cargo compartment 86 Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. Opening and closing G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 375). Opening You can open the tailgate automatically with the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate. Open or close the tailgate fully using the automatic door function if you have stopped the tailgate in an intermediate position. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the tailgate opens. or X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and let it go again immediately. i You can also close the tailgate manually if it is fully opened. ! If you have opened the tailgate automatically, you should wait a moment before closing the tailgate manually. Closing G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. You can close the tailgate automatically using the SmartKey, the closing button2 or the locking button3. Closing and locking button (example: vehicle with EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO) X To close: press closing button : on the tailgate. or X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the tailgate closes. X To close and lock simultaneously: Press locking button ; on the tailgate. 2 3 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only. For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only. Cargo compartment closed with the SmartKey if it is not in the ignition lock. If the tailgate touches an object while closing, the closing procedure is interrupted and the tailgate reopens. i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock. The tailgate is not closed unless a KEYLESS-GO key is detected. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 375). You can open and close the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Opening/closing automatically from inside G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. X To open: pull remote operating switch : for the tailgate until the tailgate opens. X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press remote operating switch for tailgate : until the tailgate is closed. You hear a tone during the closing procedure. Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate Important safety notes You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 8 in (20 cm) before the stop. This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficient space above the tailgate. ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside. Z Opening and closing i The tailgate can only be opened and 87 Side windows 88 Activating Opening Opening and closing X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate. X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button (Y page 85) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again. X To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening. i To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. This does not delete the stored position. Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button (Y page 85) in the tailgate until you hear two short tones. Tailgate emergency release Important safety notes ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 375). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 78). X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening in paneling :. X Turn mechanical key ;90° clockwise. X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of the arrow and open the tailgate. i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 83), the cargo compartment is also locked. Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the Side windows G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows Rrelease Rshifting : Front left ; Front right Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window. = Rear right ? Rear left The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 66). Z Opening and closing switch or press the switch down to open the side window again. 89 Side windows 90 Opening and closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Convenience opening You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel and the roller sunblinds Ropen i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Convenience closing feature General notes When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Rclose G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: With the SmartKey: Rrelease the & button. and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel open again. Using KEYLESS-GO: Rpress Rrelease the sensor surface on the door handle. Rpull the door handle immediately and hold it. Side windows Using the SmartKey i The SmartKey must be close to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X driver's door handle. X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if a side window can no longer be closed fully. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Z Opening and closing The side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel open. 91 Sliding sunroof 92 Problems with the side windows Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X Opening and closing X Remove the objects. Close the side window. Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Sliding sunroof Important safety notes In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Sliding sunroof Operating the sliding sunroof The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The sliding sunroof can only be operated when the roller sunblinds are open. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed. Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof General notes The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the sliding sunroof is closed. G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between Z Opening and closing Sliding sunroof reversing feature 93 94 Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Opening and closing Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds if the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the 3 button to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; until the sliding sunroof is open approximately 4 in (10 cm). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. Sliding sunroof Press the 3 button to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; until the roller sunblinds are open approximately 4 in (10 cm). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 93). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be Problems with the sliding sunroof Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Z Opening and closing X 95 96 97 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information .............................. 98 Correct driver's seat position ............ 98 Seats .................................................... 99 Steering wheel .................................. 104 Mirrors ............................................... 106 Memory function .............................. 109 Correct driver's seat position 98 Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Correct driver's seat position Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 104). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 104) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 105) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 56). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 58). The seat belt should: Rfit X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 99). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 100) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 106). X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror Rbe Seats Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. G WARNING If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the upright position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in the upright position. G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors settings with the memory function (Y page 109). 99 Seats 100 heating, observe the following information: The time period starts over again if, within these three minutes, you: Rkeep Ropen Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. or close a front door Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock or remove it from the ignition lock the ignition on or off If the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock, the seats can be adjusted at any time. Rswitch Depending on the equipment, the seat adjustment buttons are either located on the side of the seat or on the door control panel. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 102). For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. : Seat cushion angle ; Seat height = Seat fore-and-aft adjustment ? Backrest angle i Further related subjects: RCargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear bench seat) (Y page 276) Adjusting the seats i Vehicles without Memory function: the seats can be adjusted within three minutes of a front door being opened. : Seat cushion angle ; Seat height = Seat fore-and-aft adjustment ? Backrest angle A Head restraint height4 4 For vehicles with memory function only. Seats i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 109). 101 Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height5 Adjusting the head restraints G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. Adjusting the angle of the head restraints General notes Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 99). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. X Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically X 5 Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 100) up or down in the direction of the arrow. For vehicles without memory function only. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust Seats 102 Rear seat head restraints Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch :. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle Adjust the head restraints so that they are as close as possible to your head. You can only adjust the two outer head restraints. X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until it is in the desired position. To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. Adjusting the lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seats so as to provide optimum support for your back. X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. Seats 103 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Driver's and front-passenger seat : To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour Switching the seat heating on/off Activating/deactivating G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. 104 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Adjusting the steering wheel manually G WARNING If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. Steering wheel : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 233). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. The steering wheel swings upwards when you: i Further related subjects: Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 105) RStoring settings (Y page 109) Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock i The steering wheel only moves upwards if EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. it has not already reached the upper end stop. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or Ryou Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel electrically 105 Mirrors 106 when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 109). Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated after starting the vehicle if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10 minutes. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster. Mirrors Rear-view mirror X X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 234): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door. X i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. i If you are driving faster than 9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Setting the exterior mirrors This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 234). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors6: press and hold mirrorfolding button until you hear a click followed by an impact sound. (Y page 107) The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 106). Automatic anti-glare mirrors The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. Rincident 6 Only for Canada. Z 107 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Mirrors Mirrors 108 The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Setting and storing the parking position Using reverse gear You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Using the memory button You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb should be visible. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Calling up a stored parking position setting X X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function 109 Memory function Storing settings If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides X Adjust the seat (Y page 100). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 105) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 106). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X Calling up a stored setting ! If you want to move the seat from the fully reclined position to a stored seat position, first raise the backrest. The seat could otherwise be damaged. X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING 110 111 112 112 118 119 122 Lights and windshield wipers Useful information ............................ Exterior lighting ................................ Interior lighting ................................. Replacing bulbs ................................. Windshield wipers ............................ 112 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. Lights and windshield wipers i Read the information on qualified Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch combination switch (Y page 114) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 231) Rthe Light switch Operation specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. 1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps 3T Parking lamps, license plate and Notes on driving abroad Conversion to symmetrical low beam Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road from the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries. Conversion to asymmetrical low beam after returning Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again. instrument cluster lighting 4à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp CN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog lamps) If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0. Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. à is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Only for Canada: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to T, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 231). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Low-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Front fog lamps In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve visibility as well as making it easier for other road users to see you. They can be operated together with the parking lamps or together Z 113 Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting Lights and windshield wipers 114 Exterior lighting with the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps. X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the front fog lamps: press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function. Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the countryspecific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Parking lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Turn signal : High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. Exterior lighting X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. High-beam flasher X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. Hazard warning lamps The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed. vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a halt. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Rthe If the vehicle returns to a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h) after a full application of the brakes, the hazard warning lamps are deactivated automatically. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 122). When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Active light function Z Lights and windshield wipers High-beam headlamps 115 116 Exterior lighting The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. Lights and windshield wipers Cornering light function Adaptive Highbeam Assist Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rif Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or you are driving at speeds below 25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel. Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn signals or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. snow on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Rdirt General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Headlamps fogged up on the inside Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off X To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the onboard computer (Y page 231). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 114). The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 28 mph (45 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. X Switch on the lights and drive off. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 117 Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting 118 Interior lighting Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Automatic interior lighting control Lights and windshield wipers X Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off To activate/deactivate: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 232). Ropen Manual interior lighting control X Rear-compartment overhead control panel : p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the interior lighting on/off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. Replacing bulbs The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs G WARNING Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 119). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Rit Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Z Lights and windshield wipers Crash-responsive emergency lighting 119 120 Replacing bulbs Changing the front bulbs Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Lights and windshield wipers Halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp/parking lamp/ standing lamp: H15 55 W/15 W = Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards, disconnect it and pull it out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;, push it down and secure it in place. X Attach housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W High-beam headlamps, standing/ parking lamps (halogen headlamps) : Backup lamp: W 16 W X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Replacing bulbs Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. Cornering light function (Bi-Xenon headlamps) X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Grip the back of lever extension ; and pull it out in a straight line. X Take the bulb out of lever extension ;. X Insert the new bulb into lever extension ;. X X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Push the lever of holder ; upwards until holder ; is released. X Pull out bulb holder ;. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert holder ; from above and press it until it engages. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Re-insert lever extension ; downwards (swelling) with guide rail =. Changing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels You must open the side trim panel in the cargo compartment before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps. Turn signal Left-hand side trim panel Z Lights and windshield wipers X 121 Windshield wipers 122 Lights and windshield wipers Right-hand side trim panel X To open: turn release knob : 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove side trim panel ;. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn release knob : 90° in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Backup lamp :: remove the bulb from bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Re-install bulb holder. X Turn fender nut 90° clockwise. X Insert the connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 121). Tail lamp X Switch off the lights. X Open the cargo compartment. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 121). Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/ off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on X X Pull out connector :. Turn fender nut ; 90° counter-clockwise and pull out the bulb holder. the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Windshield wipers 123 Switching the rear window wiper on/ off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low7 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high8 Combination switch : è Switch 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping B í Single wipe/î To wipe the 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping windshield using washer fluid X Switch on the ignition. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall. 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the icon appears in the instrument cluster. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/rear window. 7 8 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. Rain sensor set to high sensitivity. Z Lights and windshield wipers Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off 124 Windshield wipers Lights and windshield wipers Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/ rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Removing the wiper blades X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. Changing the windshield wiper blades Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position ! Before changing the wiper blades, always set the wiper arms to a vertical position using the combination switch. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the hood. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the SmartKey to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO X Switch off the engine. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wipers start. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Installing the wiper blades X Push the new wiper blade onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. Replacing the rear window wiper blade Removing the wiper blades Windshield wipers 125 X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases. X Remove wiper blade ;. Lights and windshield wipers Installing the wiper blade X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages. X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. Z 126 Windshield wipers Lights and windshield wipers Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. 127 128 128 133 140 Climate control Useful information ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control systems ................................................... Setting the air vents ......................... 128 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified Climate control specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch Rswitch off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 139). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 90). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is possible that the dehumidification function of the climate control system may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Overview of climate control systems 129 Canada only : To set the temperature, left (Y page 136) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 137) = To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 137) ? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133) A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 136) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139) D To set the air distribution (Y page 136) E To increase the airflow (Y page 137) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 137) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 133) H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 135) Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control Climate control 130 Overview of climate control systems USA only : To set the temperature, left (Y page 136) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 137) = To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 138) ? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133) A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 136) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139) D To set the air distribution (Y page 136) E To increase the airflow (Y page 137) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 137) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 133) H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 135) Notes on using climate control Automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dualzone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO start/stop function only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full Overview of climate control systems 131 Climate control climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 150). 132 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control Canada only : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I J Front control panel To set the temperature, left (Y page 136) To defrost the windshield (Y page 137) To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 139) To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133) To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138) To set the temperature, right (Y page 136) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 137) To switch climate control on/off (Y page 133) To set the air distribution (Y page 136) To increase the airflow (Y page 137) To reduce the airflow (Y page 137) To adjust airflow (Y page 135) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139) To set climate control to automatic (Y page 135) Rear control panel K To increase the airflow (Y page 137) L To reduce the airflow (Y page 137) M Display N To reduce the temperature (Y page 136) O To increase the temperature (Y page 136) Operating the climate control systems Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ñ button to adjust airflow (FOCUS/ MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO start/stop function only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 150). Operating the climate control systems Switching climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly i Switch on climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 135). Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with airdehumidification function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled Climate control Notes on using 3-zone automatic climate control 133 Operating the climate control systems 134 and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating Climate control X To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. i When the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated, one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary heating button will light up on vehicles with auxiliary heating. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. Operating the climate control systems 135 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the ¿ button flashes three times or remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with airdehumidification function only briefly. Activating/switching X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. 3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can adjust airflow (Y page 135). X To select manually: press the _ button. or X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Adjusting airflow This function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control. In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings: FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less draft X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X Press the à button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the required airflow setting appears in the display. Climate control Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Operating the climate control systems 136 Setting the temperature Dual-zone automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To increase/reduce: turn control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 129). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). 3-zone automatic climate control9 X Turn control : clockwise or counterclockwise (Y page 132). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the 9 or : button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than 30 minutes, the temperature setting for the rear compartment then switches back to 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings Automatic climate control zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 132). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Canada only. for USA. 11 Canada only. 9 10 Only Dual-zone climate control: the air distribution can be set individually for the driver's and front-passenger sides. ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the center and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents10 _ Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle interior11 b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents11 a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Operating the climate control systems X X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. Setting the airflow X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. i You can use 3-zone automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower output may be reduced. As soon as the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower output will be available. Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. When the buttons for temperature, airflow or air distribution are pressed, the temperature setting on the driver's side is not adopted for the other climate control zones. To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. Defrosting the windshield You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows. i You should only select the "windshield defrosting" function until the windshield is clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower output may be reduced. As soon as the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower output will be available. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or Climate control Adjusting 137 Operating the climate control systems 138 X Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Turn temperature control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 129), (Y page 132). Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the O or P symbol appears in the display. X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is directed to the side windows. or X Press the K or I button. Rear window defroster General notes Climate control MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling airflow Rair-recirculation mode on X To activate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. X To activate: press the Ù button again. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Rmaximum Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed air is directed to the side windows. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Operating the climate control systems 139 Problems with the rear window defroster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use airrecirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. i In the event of high pollution levels12 or at high outside temperatures, airrecirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function General notes The residual heat function is only available in vehicles for Canada with automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. 12 3-zone automatic climate control only. Climate control Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode Setting the air vents 140 i If you activate the residual heat function i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the center position. at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. Activating/deactivating Setting the center air vents X Climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 145) or remove it. X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. i If the residual heat function is activated, the windows may fog up on the inside. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen Setting the air vents X To open the center air vent: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents : counter-clockwise. X To close the center air vent: turn the adjuster in one of center air vents : clockwise until it engages. Setting the side air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; counter-clockwise. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise until it engages. Setting the air vents Setting the glove box air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. 141 Setting the rear-compartment air vents ! Close the air vent when heating the : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear control panel, only with 3-zone automatic climate control13 ? Rear-compartment air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or counter-clockwise. 13 Canada only. Z Climate control vehicle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged. 142 Useful information ............................ Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving ............................................... Automatic transmission ................... Refueling ............................................ Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ Towing a trailer ................................. 144 144 144 152 158 164 166 173 212 Driving and parking 143 144 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. i You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. i Always observe the respective speed limits. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Important safety notes New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles(1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km), drive in program E. RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Driving G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. Key positions SmartKey g To remove the SmartKey (shift the transmission to position P) 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can impair the functionality of the KEYLESS-GO key. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be started with the Start/Stop button if the SmartKey is in the vehicle. Electrically powered equipment can be operated. The steering is locked when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Z Driving and parking Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 145 Driving 146 i The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and press Start/Stop button : once when in this position Driving and parking Ryou As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (Y page 263). : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately 2 seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of parking position P. Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshift Start/Stop button = USA only ? Canada only X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated. X Position 2: (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Driving Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey with the integrated KEYLESS-GO function is in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. when starting the engine. General notes i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey i To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ Stop button out of the ignition lock. X To start a gasoline engine: turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 145) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the SmartKey to position 3(Y page 145) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 145). The engine starts. Pulling away Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock remains engaged. Z Driving and parking G WARNING 147 Driving 148 Driving and parking X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 165). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release Park. Brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 232). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. Every time you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 150) or a Driving Automatic engine switch-off General notes The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine has been stopped automatically. i The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession. The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible. Vehicles with automatic transmission If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Automatic engine start General notes The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button. Ryou engage reverse gear R. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range. Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too low. Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the driver's door is opened. Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not activated and the transmission is in position D or N. Rdepress the accelerator pedal. Rmove the transmission out of position P. i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available Z Driving and parking malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed. 149 Driving 150 Driving and parking again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function ECO button X To switch off: press button :. Indicator lamp ; on button : and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To switch on: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 149) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 149) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Driving 151 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting to start the engine again. RThere or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 146). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 320). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 152 Automatic transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 ‡ (120 †). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 304). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions G WARNING The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (Y page 153) in the multifunction display. Automatic transmission : Transmission position display ; Drive program display i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey. Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/ Stop button and open one of the front doors. Rthe HOLD (Y page 183) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175) function brake your vehicle until it is stationary and at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - there is a system malfunction. - the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill gradient. The electric parking brake is then also applied. Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. X The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Engaging park position P Shifting to neutral N X X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. i The automatic transmission shifts into park position P automatically: Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R Rif you open the door while traveling at very low speeds in transmission position D or R ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to N. Remaining in neutral N If the automatic transmission is to remain in neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car washes with a towing device, please observe the following instructions: Z Driving and parking Transmission position and drive program display 153 154 Automatic transmission G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Driving and parking Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting to neutral N. the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is applied, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. RShift RRelease Engaging drive position D X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. Transmission positions brake pedal and keep it depressed. to neutral N. RRelease the brake pedal. RIf the electric parking brake is applied, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Using KEYLESS-GO: Park position Do not shift the transmission into position P(Y page 164) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you: RMake Rremove B Using the SmartKey: RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the RShift sure that the ignition is switched on. the SmartKey off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. park position P. RRelease the brake pedal. RRemove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. RSwitch on the ignition. RDepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rswitch REngage C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Automatic transmission Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. The transmission could otherwise be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train. 7 Towing a trailer X When traveling downhill, switch to a lower gear if the automatic transmission constantly switches between two gears. X Engaging a lower gear and reducing the speed reduces the risk of the engine overheating. Program selector button General notes The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program E/S(Y page 155) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Driving tips Kickdown Program selector button E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display. Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Z Driving and parking A 155 156 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Steering wheel paddle shifters Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points Manual drive program M : Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter In the manual drive program, you can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 156). i You can only change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Drive program E is characterized by the following: Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rsporty engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear General notes In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. You can activate manual drive program M in the E and S automatic drive programs. Activating X Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 156). Manual drive program M is temporarily activated. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. Shifting gears If you pull on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 156). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 156). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic transmission engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. i Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. Shift recommendation or X Use the program selector button to change the drive program (Y page 155). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Deactivating If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S. You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 156). or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. Z Driving and parking i If the engine exceeds the maximum 157 158 Refueling Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. ! To prevent ESP® from intervening, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). The brake system could otherwise be damaged. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Refueling If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the RWash ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. fuel system. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 367). Refueling Opening/closing the fuel filler flap G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. ! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Fuel type to be used The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESSGO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Z Driving and parking away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. 159 Refueling 160 To open Driving and parking X Switch the engine off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". The driver’s door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap fully. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. To close X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 249). In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 268). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 268). Refueling 161 Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 145). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 145). X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (Y page 145). X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problem 162 Refueling DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) Driving and parking Important notes on use To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the tasks performed during maintenance. Under normal operating conditions, a tank of DEF lasts until the next service due date. When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message is shown in the multifunction display. When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in the multifunction display. If the Remaining Starts: 16 message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is not refilled, you will subsequently be unable to start the engine. Refill the DEF tank with around 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF or have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding DEF between maintenance intervals. Contact a qualified specialist workshop with any questions or, if necessary, contact Roadside Assistance (Y page 24). If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ (Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It will then be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Important safety notes on the refilling procedure DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnot poisonous and odorless Rnot flammable When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible. Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas. DEF must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed. Keep DEF away from children. If you or other persons come into contact with DEF, observe the following: Rcolorless RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with soap and water. DEF comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RChange out of clothing contaminated with DEF immediately. RIf ! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. ! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEF immediately with water or remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF Refueling 163 residues crystallize after time and contaminate the affected surfaces. added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage. ! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle handtight. It could otherwise be damaged. The DEF filler neck is under the cargo compartment floor. X Switch the ignition off. X Open the tailgate. X Lift up the cargo compartment floor (Y page 314). X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle =. X Set DEF refill bottle = as shown on the filler neck and screw it on hand-tight. X Press DEF refill bottle = downward. The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one minute. i To top up between service intervals, fill the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF. 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF is equivalent to approximately 2 DEF refill bottles. Then have the DEF supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop and completely refilled if necessary. X X Turn DEF cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn DEF filler cap ; counter-clockwise and open it. Filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip. Release DEF refill bottle =. When DEF refill bottle = is no longer pressed down, filling stops. DEF refill bottle = can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. X Turn DEF refill bottle = counter-clockwise and remove it. X Place DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck and turn it clockwise. Z Driving and parking ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be Parking 164 Driving and parking X Replace DEF cover : as shown and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X Fold the cargo compartment floor down. X Close the tailgate. X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). The Check Additive See Operator's Manual message goes out after approximately one minute. i If the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message remains shown in the multifunction display, add an additional bottle of DEF. For further information on DEF, see (Y page 370). Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the curb. Rthe Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Parking X Apply the parking brake firmly. X Shift the transmission to position P. Using the SmartKey X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. i The SmartKey can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. Using KEYLESS-GO X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 145). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of the parking position P Rstarting the engine. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshifting If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the brake lamps will not light up. i In the event of an emergency, the engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. Parking brake G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. When the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. Z Driving and parking Vehicles with automatic transmission 165 Driving tips 166 Driving and parking X Connecting a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Driving tips ECO display The ECO display gives you information on how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the optimum driving style in terms of consumption, taking the actual and selected conditions into consideration. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. Example: ECO display The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption and a fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption figure. Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: Rload Rtire pressure start Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not taken into consideration by the ECO display. The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories: RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds - The bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at all times): - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes): - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. - The bar empties: frequent braking Rcold i An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E. i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change. Z Driving and parking Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. 167 168 Driving tips Driving and parking i The ECO display summaries the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 224). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes. When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planning to have the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train or the brake system. ! As the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) when: Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dynamometer. Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with the front or rear axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads. You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (Y page 68). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Parking brake G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the brake lamps will not light up. If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered surfaces, road salt and/or dirt could get into the parking brake. In order to prevent corrosion and a reduction in the braking power of the parking brake, observe the following: Rgently depress the parking brake from time to time before beginning the journey. yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Rdrive for approximately 110 Z 169 Driving and parking Driving tips 170 Driving tips Driving on wet roads Driving and parking Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rthe Rlower your speed. ruts. Rbrake carefully. Ravoid Driving on flooded roads ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage. Prevent water from entering the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. If you must drive through standing water, bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in still water is 12 in (30 cm) Ryou should drive no faster than at walking pace Off-road fording ! Under no circumstances should you accelerate before entering the water. The bow wave could cause water to enter and damage the engine and other assemblies. ! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while fording. Otherwise, water could get into the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's electronics and interior equipment. REstablish how deep the water is and the characteristics of the body of water before fording. RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. RAvoid high engine speeds. REnter and exit the water at a flat place and at a steady walking pace. RDrive slowly and at an even speed through the water. RDo not stop. RWater offers a high degree of resistance, and the ground is slippery and in some cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water. REnsure that a bow wave does not form as you drive. RClean any mud from the tire tread after fording. RApply the brakes to dry them after fording. Always observe the fording depth values (Y page 375). Winter driving Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 332). Driving with summer tires Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 332). Slippery road surfaces G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 333). The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Off-road driving Important safety notes G WARNING If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident. Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle. When driving off-road, sand, mud and water, possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get into the brakes. This could result in a reduced braking effect or in total brake failure and also in increased wear and tear. The braking characteristics change depending on the material ingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced braking effect or grinding noises, have the brake system checked in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the different braking characteristics. Driving off-road increases the likelihood of damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to failure of the mechanical assembly or systems. Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is Z 171 Driving and parking Driving tips 172 Driving tips too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear. Driving and parking General notes H Environmental note Protection of the environment is of primary importance. Treat nature with respect. Observe all prohibiting signs. Read this section carefully before driving your vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more gentle off-road terrain first. Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of your vehicle and the gear shift operation before driving through difficult terrain. Checklist before driving off-road ! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Check the engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp warning must not be ignored. Continuing the journey while the symbol is displayed could lead to engine damage. Checklist after driving off-road Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and other road users. Driving on sand Observe the following rules when driving on sand: Ruse the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to the terrain. Rdrive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuck in loose ground. Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that: - the tire ruts are not too deep. - the sand is sufficiently firm. - the ground clearance of the vehicle is sufficient. Tire ruts and gravel roads Observe the following rules when driving along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose gravel: ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or bottom out and get stuck. Driving over obstacles ! Obstacles could damage the floor of the vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask passengers for guidance when driving over large obstacles. The passenger should always keep a safe distance from the vehicle when doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of unexpected vehicle movements. After driving off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle for possible damage, especially to the underbody and the components of the chassis. Observe the following rules when driving over tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles: Ravoid high engine speeds. Rshift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. Driving systems very slowly. to drive straight over the center of obstacles: front wheel first, then rear wheel. Rtry Maximum gradient-climbing capability Always observe the maximum gradient climbing ability values (Y page 376). Hilltops Traveling uphill Approach/departure angle G WARNING If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident. Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle. RObserve the rules on off-road driving. RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or gradients, but instead follow the direct line of fall. RDrive slowly. RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropriate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm). RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand paddle shifter before tackling steep downhill gradients. RWhen driving down an incline, make use of the engine's braking effect. Observe the engine speed; do not overrev the engine. RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road driving. i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on a hill. For further information about hill start assist, see (Y page 148). Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear. Always observe the approach/departure angle values (Y page 376). When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the brow. This style of driving prevents: Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the brow of a hill Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down the other side Driving downhill RDrive slowly. not drive at an angle down steep inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive with the front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand paddle shifter before tackling steep downhill gradients. RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake gently. When doing so, make sure that the vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of fall. RCheck that the brakes are working normally after a long downhill stretch. RDo Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a low gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing Z Driving and parking Rdrive 173 Driving and parking 174 Driving systems so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. i Cruise control should not be activated when driving off-road. Cruise control lever : To activate or increase speed ; To activate or reduce speed = To deactivate cruise control ? To activate at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Driving systems i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake. are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h). RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. You must select a low gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Z Driving and parking Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed 175 176 Driving systems Driving and parking If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the lefthand lane Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To store the current speed or a lower speed = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS ? To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing and maintaining the current speed Activation conditions In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Z 177 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 178 Driving systems transmission must be in position D. hood must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Rthe i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at Rthe under 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in front has been detected. For this reason, it is helpful if you have the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 228). Activating while driving When driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tone sounds. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slowermoving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or press it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 180). Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving faster, it accelerates your vehicle, but only up to the speed you have stored. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph (60 km/h) RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Driving systems switch on the appropriate turn signal vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles. Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 181). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe hood is opened. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. Setting a speed X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. i Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the Z Driving and parking Ryou 179 Driving systems 180 Storing the current speed or calling up a stored speed Driving and parking X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 180). X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient distance to the vehicle in front and comply with the minimum distance as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 228) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance display. Driving systems Driving and parking Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Assist. Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 228). When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will see the following in the multifunction display: : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS activated Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated X Select the Assist. Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 228). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the following in the multifunction display while DISTRONIC PLUS is activated: There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X 181 Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Z 182 Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: engage the parking brake are driving slower than 15 mph (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle has skidded If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC PLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system, the Brake Immediately message appears in the multifunction display. Depress the brake pedal immediately so that the vehicle does not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated, and the message disappears. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend Ryou Driving and parking Ryou Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lanes Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. 183 Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. i Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces. Z Driving and parking Narrow vehicles 184 Driving systems Important safety notes G WARNING Driving and parking When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 184). Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe parking brake is released Rthe hood is closed. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe Activating the HOLD function X Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ë appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. When the HOLD function is activated in vehicles with an automatic transmission, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe hood is opened. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. The horn will also sound at regular intervals if the HOLD function is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and remove your seat belt. Ropen the hood. The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD function is deactivated. i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until the HOLD function has been deactivated. If there is a malfunction in the system or power supply while the HOLD function is activated, the Brake Immediately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. You can also shift the transmission to position P. This deactivates the HOLD function. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Rshift PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 309). Z 185 Driving and parking Driving systems 186 Driving systems Driving and parking warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. Side view Top view Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the Front sensors Center Corners Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Driving systems Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated 187 Towing a trailer hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Z Driving and parking ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow 188 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 309). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or approximately five ultrasound waves. seconds. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 185). When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING The vehicle swings out when parking and in doing so could cross into the opposite lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users when parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Driving systems Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 186) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rwhen snow chains or an emergency spare wheel are mounted, you should not use Active Parking Assist here either. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If there are objects above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on. This must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range, Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely. Example: detected parking space : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle Rthat Z Driving and parking Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: 189 190 Driving systems Driving and parking A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking G WARNING Active Parking Assist merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. If you do not brake there is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself when maneuvering and parking. i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time. Active Parking Assist does not support you with parking spaces parallel to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings Rthe message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. X X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Further transmission shifts may be necessary. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Disabled message appears and a warning tone sounds. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions. When Active Driving systems Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should a gear be changed too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is maneuvering into the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available. X Start the engine. X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing the street. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Shift the transmission to position D or R as required while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Z Driving and parking Parking Assist is finished, you must steer again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. X Maneuver if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 186). 191 Driving systems Driving and parking 192 Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Canceling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Towing a trailer For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. Rear view camera General notes or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center console (Y page 187). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist Canceled message. If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again. Rtransmission : Rear view camera Rear view camera : is located in the handle strip of the tailgate. Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/ COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always Driving systems Rthe tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). Rin Activating/deactivating the rear view camera X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear" setting is active in COMAND, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display with guide lines. X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the separate COMAND operating instructions). The symbol of the selected function is highlighted. To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates in vehicles with an automatic transmission if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Displays in the Audio/COMAND display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle Runder ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe Z Driving and parking responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: 193 Driving and parking 194 Driving systems : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle = Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Additional messages for vehicles with PARKTRONIC : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 186), an additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMAND display ;. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display. "Reverse parking" function X A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Make sure that the rear view camera is activated and the "Reverse parking" function is selected; see the separate operating instructions for the audio system/COMAND. The lane and the guide lines are shown. Driving systems Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle : White guide line without turning the Turning the steering wheel : Red guide line for the vehicle width steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 193). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Driving and parking Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel 195 including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ; Parking space marking X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 193). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line : reaches parking space marking ;. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully. Backing up with the steering wheel turned : Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Z Driving systems 196 Driving and parking X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. "Coupling up a trailer" function This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch and COMAND. ! The following distance specifications refer to trailer tow hitches with ball coupling that have been approved for this vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances may differ if you use other ball couplings. In this case, take into account that actual distances will not match the following distance specifications. Otherwise you could damage the trailer and vehicle. Driving to the final position : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. : Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar = Ball coupling : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than ball coupling =. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. : Ball coupling ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling = Trailer drawbar marker assistant ? Trailer drawbar A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function X Select symbol A using the COMAND controller, see COMAND. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar marker assistant = points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar ?. X Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbar ? reaches red guide line ;. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 212). 360° camera The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit. The 360° camera images can be shown in full screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the COMAND display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The seven split-screen views are: Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and picture from the front camera (without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer tow hitch) Rtop view and pictures from the rearward facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and pictures from the forward facing mirror cameras (front wheel view) i The top view and trailer view are available for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow hitch. When the function is active and you shift the transmission from position D or R to N, you see the previous view in the COMAND display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. General notes Important safety notes The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system analyzes images from the following cameras: The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. RRear view camera camera RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors RFront Z 197 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 198 Driving systems The 360° camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. It cannot show objects in the following areas: Runder the front bumper Rvery close to the front bumper Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open the exterior mirrors are folded in Rthe tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif you exit a heated garage in winter, resulting in a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. Rif Activation conditions The 360° camera image can be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate COMAND operating instructions Rthe 360° Camera function is activated Activating the 360° camera using the SYS button X Press and hold the W button for longer than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Rfull screen display with the image from the rear camera Activating the 360° camera with COMAND X Press the W button, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select 360° Camera and press W to confirm. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera For further information about the COMAND controller, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. Driving systems The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear setting is active in COMAND, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The COMAND display shows the area behind the vehicle in split screen: Rvehicle with guide lines Rtop view of the vehicle Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays X To switch between split screen views: switch to the line with the vehicle icons by sliding ZV the COMAND controller. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and select one of the vehicle symbols. X Top view with picture from the rear view camera : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) To switch to full screen mode: select Full Screen by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Displays in the COMAND display Important safety notes ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Z Driving and parking Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear 199 200 Driving systems Driving and parking Top view with picture from the front camera Top view and enlarged rear view : Symbol for the split screen setting with : Symbol for the split screen setting with ; = ? A B top view and front camera image Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle top view and rear view camera image enlarged ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you. i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view. Top view with picture from the mirror camera : Symbol for the top view and forward- facing mirror camera setting ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle) Driving systems Top view with trailer view 201 i The full screen display can also be selected as front view. : Symbol for the trailer view setting As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activated, the function switches off. The COMAND display switches back to the previously selected view. You can also switch the display by selecting the & symbol in the display and pressing W the COMAND controller. ; Trailer drawbar marker assistant = Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling Display with the PARKTRONIC display Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC display : Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC and the function is active (Y page 187), warning displays ; in the COMAND display are also active or light up accordingly. PARKTRONIC appears: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Z Driving and parking Exiting 360° camera display mode Driving systems 202 Driving and parking Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) Rif you are currently using COMAND or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 229). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Drowsiness detected message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. The precondition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. The assistance graphic shows the é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated (Y page 228). Ryou Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 202) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 204). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the Z 203 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 204 indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when: SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock Rthe engine is not running Rthe electrical connection to the trailer has been established Rthe Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. X Towing a trailer When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function (Y page 230), Lane Keeping Assist is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Driving systems G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane Switching on Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 228) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Standard If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Z Driving and parking Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. 205 206 Driving systems Driving and parking Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Towing a trailer When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 206) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 209). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle which are behind the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the course- correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. The free space is then evaluated in the direction of travel and to the side before a course-correcting brake application is initiated. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It does not detect all traffic situations and road users and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Driving systems 207 i Canada only: This device complies with Monitoring range of the sensors G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. Driving and parking RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers respectively. An additional radar sensor is located behind the cover in the radiator grill. Make sure that the sensors and areas around them are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 208 Driving systems Driving and parking Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Visual and acoustic collision warning When you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and the following is shown in the multifunction display, for example: Either a very slight course-correcting brake application, or none at all, may occur if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Rthe off-road program is activated. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X Towing a trailer When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function (Y page 230), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. General notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera : mounted at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist Z 209 Driving and parking Driving systems 210 Driving systems In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Driving and parking Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and there are broken lane markings Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. Driving systems i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou switch on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established. RESP® is switched off. transmission is not in position D. off-road program is activated. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic situations or road users. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rthe Rthe Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction a turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ruse Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 228) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Z Driving and parking This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, the following, for example, appears in the multifunction display: 211 212 Towing a trailer steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Driving and parking Ryou Towing a trailer When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Towing a trailer Notes on towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. G WARNING When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even rollover. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle speed and do not countersteer. Apply the brake as necessary. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. Please observe the manufacturer's operating instructions for the trailer coupling if a detachable trailer coupling is used. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found: Rthe Rin the vehicle documents Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, the trailer and the vehicle If the values differ, the lowest value applies. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 376). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning radius This could impair the handling characteristics. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination. Ris General notes RDo not exceed the legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the relevant country. This lowers the risk of an accident. ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on your vehicle. Further information on availability and on installation is available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable for installing detachable trailer couplings. RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers of your vehicle. RTo reduce the risk of damage to the ball coupling, remove it from the ball coupling recess when not in use. i When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 351). Please note that when towing a trailer, PARKTRONIC (Y page 185) is only available with limitations or not at all. i On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a heightadjustable drawbar. You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 376). Driving tips i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilization (Y page 71). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permissible speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle. If you utilize any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/ trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer. Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so that less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Driving tips RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradientZ 213 Driving and parking Towing a trailer Towing a trailer 214 climbing capability, decreases with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: Driving and parking X Do not accelerate. Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. X Installing the ball coupling G WARNING If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling is installed and secured correctly before every journey. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use ball couplings that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle. vehicle is in motion and fall onto the road. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling is installed and secured correctly before every journey. Coupling up a trailer Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimensions (width and length). Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces require by law: Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be crosswound under the trailer drawbar. They must be fastened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to the bumper or the axle. Leave enough play in the chains to make tight cornering possible. Ra separate brake system for certain types of trailer. Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Check the specific legal requirements applicable to your state. If the trailer detaches from the towing vehicle, the safety switch applies the trailer's brakes. ! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result in a loss of function of the brake systems of both the vehicle and the trailer. Cover cap X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the arrow, out of ball coupling recess ;. X Store protective cap : in a safe place. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. G WARNING If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly it can become detached while the i The vehicle's wiring harness features a connection to the brake indicator lamp. X Make sure that the automatic transmission is set to position P. X Apply the vehicle's parking brake. X Close all doors and the tailgate. X X Couple up the trailer. Establish all electrical connections. Towing a trailer There are numerous legal requirements concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restrictions. Make sure that your car/trailer combination complies with the local regulations: Rin your place of residence the location to which you are driving The police and local authorities can provide reliable information. Observe the following when towing a trailer: Rin RTo gain driving experience and to become accustomed to the new handling characteristics, you should practice the following in a traffic-free location: - cornering - stopping - backing up RBefore driving, check: - the trailer tow hitch - the safety switch for braked trailers - the safety chains - electrical connections - the lights - the wheels RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an unobstructed view of the rear section of the trailer. RIf the trailer has electronically controlled brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes function correctly. RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is in motion. RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is firmly secured. If the trailer is equipped with trailer lights and brakes, check the trailer to ensure that these are working. RBear in mind that the handling will be less stable when towing a trailer than when driving without one. Avoid sudden steering movements. RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, accelerates more slowly, has a decreased gradient climbing capability and a longer braking distance. It is more susceptible to side winds and requires more careful steering. RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress the brake pedal moderately at first, so that the trailer can activate its own brakes. Then increase the pressure on the brake pedal. RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. A lower gear and lower speed reduce the risk of engine failure. RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear to utilize the engine's braking effect. Avoid continuous brake application as this may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if installed, the trailer brakes. RIf the coolant temperature increases dramatically while the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch off the airconditioning system. Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated by opening the windows and by setting the blower fan and the interior temperature to maximum. RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention to the extended length of your vehicle/ trailer combination. Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combination, you require additional road space in relation to the vehicle you are overtaking, before you can change back to the original lane. Z 215 Driving and parking Towing a trailer Towing a trailer 216 Decoupling a trailer Driving and parking G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun brake engaged, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. There is a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake is engaged. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an pay attention to the respective lowest values. RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling must be added to the rear axle load to avoid exceeding the permissible gross axle weight. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. i Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's permissible gross weight. engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. X Make sure that the automatic transmission is set to position P. X Apply the vehicle's parking brake. X Close all doors and the tailgate. X Apply the trailer's parking brake. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. Permissible trailer loads and drawbar loads Weight specifications The gross trailer weight is calculated by adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the load and equipment on the trailer. You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 376). Loading a trailer RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that neither the permissible gross weight of the trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. You can find the maximum permissible values on the type plates of your vehicle and the trailer. When calculating how much weight the vehicle and trailer may carry, i The weight of other accessories, passengers and loads reduces: Rthe permissible trailer load permissible noseweight that your vehicle can tow Rthe Checking the vehicle and trailer weight RTo ensure compliance of the weight of the towing vehicle and the trailer with the maximum permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer combination (towing vehicle including driver, passenger, load and fully laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated weighbridge. RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer and trailer drawbar load. Removing the ball coupling X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the protective cap into the ball coupling recess. X Make sure that the protective cap is firmly in place. Towing a trailer 217 Storing the ball coupling G WARNING X Driving and parking Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle interior if it is not secured. Otherwise, you and others could be injured by the ball coupling being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Trailer power supply The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with a permanent power supply. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. ! You can connect accessories with a maximum power consumption of 240 W to the permanent power supply. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. A qualified specialist workshop can provide more information about installing the trailer electrics. Z 218 Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation .................... Menus and submenus ...................... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 220 220 220 223 235 261 On-board computer and displays 219 On-board computer and displays 220 Displays and operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 33). Displays and operation Coolant temperature display G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Tachometer The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 222). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. control activated (Y page 173): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 175): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. RCruise : Multifunction display ; Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button Left control panel Operating the on-board computer Overview The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 221 = ; RCalls up the menu and menu bar 9 : Press briefly: RScrolls in lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects Z 222 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 9 : a Press and hold: the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling of the phone book if it is open RIn a selection/display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station RRejects or ends a call phone book/redial memory RExits 6 % RMakes Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions RHides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory RConfirms Right control panel ~ Back button % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display. or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts 8 RMute the volume : Text field ; Menu bar = Drive program (Y page 153) ? Transmission position (Y page 153) A Time B Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 231) X To show menu bar;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. Text field : shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. i You can set the time using the audio Trip menu Standard display system or COMAND, see the separate operating instructions. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Shift recommendation (Y page 156) CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 173) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 116) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 148) ë HOLD function (Y page 183) X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; is shown. Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" Menus and submenus Menu overview Operating the on-board computer (Y page 221). Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 223) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 225) RAudio menu (Y page 226) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 227) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 228) RServ menu (Y page 230) RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 230) The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and in vehicles with COMAND. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND. RNavi Example: trip computer "From Start" : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, whereas the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 224). The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. Z 223 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 224 The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles. Digital speedometer Displaying the range and current fuel consumption : Shift recommendation (Y page 156) ; Digital speedometer X X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the current fuel consumption and approximate range. The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refueled C instead of the range. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. Resetting values Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start" ECO display X Example: ECO display You can reset the values of the following functions: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 167). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. RTrip odometer Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display R"From i When you reset the values in the "ECO display", the values in the trip computer "From Start" are likewise reset. When you reset the values in the trip computer "From Start", the values in the "ECO display"are likewise reset. Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information, see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on the audio system with Becker® MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active : Direction of travel : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current road ? "Follow the road's course" symbol = New lane during a change of direction ? Uninterrupted lane A Lane recommendation B Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation A for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed. Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 226 Other status indicators of the navigation system i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. For more information on satellite radio operation, see the separate operating instructions. RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Route... or Calculating Route: calculating a new route ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). RNo Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. RNew i For information on switching waveband and storing stations; see the separate operating instructions. Operating an audio player or audio media Audio menu Selecting a radio station Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current title : Waveband ; Station frequency with memory position i Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND and select the audio player or medium, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track has been reached. If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current scene X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene has been reached. X Switch on your mobile phone and audio system or COMAND, see the separate operating instructions. X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the audio system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display, for example: Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. Example: incoming call X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 228 Dialing an entry from the phone book X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction In the DriveAssist menu, you have the following options: RDisplaying the assistance graphic (Y page 228) RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 229) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 229) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 229) Displaying the assistance graphic X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance Graphic. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic (Y page 180). The assistance graphic can display the status of and information from other driving systems or driving safety systems. The assistance graphic shows: Rthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 201) is deactivated. Rthe lane markings as bright lines when Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 204) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 209) is activated. multifunction display in the assistance graphics display. æ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72) is deactivated. Rthe è symbol, when the rear window wiper (Y page 123) is activated. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 201). Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in the multifunction display. X Rthe If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 233). For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 72). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst. Sensors Deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 233). For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 202). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 206). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keep. Asst. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Standard or Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane Z 229 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 230 Menus and submenus markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 204). For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 209). Maintenance menu In the Service menu, you have the following options: RCalling up display messages (Y page 235) RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 337) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (USA only) (Y page 338) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 300) Settings menu Introduction RChanging the convenience settings (Y page 233) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 234) Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometers. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instr. Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: digital speedometer in the Trip menu odometer and the trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rthe Rthe In the Settings menu, you have the following options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 230) RChanging the light settings (Y page 231) RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 232) Selecting the permanent display function You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent Display: function. You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Additional Speedometer [km/h]/Additional Speedometer [mph]. X Press the a button to save the setting. Lights Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off Daytime running lamps are required by law (Canada only). You cannot set the "daytime running lamps" function via the on-board computer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Day Lights function. If the Day Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 113). Setting the brightness of the display/ switch X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Brightness Display/Switches: function. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Level 1 to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Adapt. Highbeam function. If the Adapt. Highbeam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the _ symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information about Adaptive Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 116). Activating/deactivating surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. Z 231 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 232 X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround Lighting function. When the Surround Lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround Lighting function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 113). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after 5 seconds. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: RParking lamps fog lamps RLow-beam headlamps RDaytime running lamps RSide marker lamps RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors RFront Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Interior Lighting Delay function. If the Interior Lighting Delay function has been switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Door Locks function. When the Auto. Door Locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 82). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. You will see the selected setting: Enabled or Disabled. X Press the a button to save the setting. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: PLUS (Y page 175) PLUS (Y page 68) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 202) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 206) RDISTRONIC RBAS Convenience Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 105). Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 234 X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt Adjustment function. When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 58). Switching the fold-in mirrors with the locking feature on/off This function is only available on vehicles with the memory function (Y page 109). This function is only available in Canada. When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (Y page 107), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. Restoring the factory settings X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. For safety reasons, the Day Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 183) and parking (Y page 164). Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The message memory allows you to call up previous display messages. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 236 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Rself-diagnosis Rthe is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X T! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F(USA only)J(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages 238 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $(USA only)J(Canada There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. only) Check Brake Fluid Level # Check Brake Pad Wear G Inoperative PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 309). X Restart the engine. PRE-SAFE Functions Limited See Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43). Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages 240 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front Left Malfunction Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunction Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Rear Center Malfunction Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even though: Ran adult or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the frontpassenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the frontpassenger air bag (Y page 49). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages 242 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 49). Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 49). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 49). Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 119). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Cornering LightorCheck Right Cornering Light b Check Left Low BeamorCheck Right Low Beam b Check Trailer Left Tail LamporCheck Trailer Right Tail Lamp The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 119). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. Z 243 On-board computer and displays Display messages 244 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. Check Trailer Left Turn SignalorCheck Trailer Right Turn Signal b Check Trailer Brake Lamp b Check Rear Left Turn SignalorCheck Rear Right Turn Signal b Check Front Left Turn SignalorCheck Front Right Turn Signal b Check Left Mirror Turn SignalorCheck Right Mirror Turn Signal b Check Center Brake Lamp b Check Left Tail and Brake LampsorCheck Right Tail and Brake Lamps The trailer brake lamp is defective. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 119). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 119). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Plate Right Plate Left License Lamp or Check License Lamp b Check Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp b Rear Fog Lamp b Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear fog lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 119). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Reverse Lamp or Check Right Reverse Lamp The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 119). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp Z 245 On-board computer and displays Display messages 246 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp b Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light b Active Headlamps Inoperative b Malfunction See Operator's Manual b Malfunction See Operator's Manual b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b Switch Off Lights The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The active light function is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 304). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Display messages 248 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Open the hood. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Ra If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 303). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 303). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 8 Fuel Level Low C The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Display messages 250 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. Gas Cap Loose If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X ¸ Replace Air Filter ! Check Fuel Filter ¯ Refill AdBlue At Workshop See Operator's Manual ¯ Refill AdBlue At Workshop No Start in .. km ¯ Refill AdBlue At Workshop Eng. Start Not Possible ¯ Check AdBlue See Operator's Manual Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The DEF level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone also sounds. X Have DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The DEF level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A warning tone also sounds. X Have DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The DEF tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¯ The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Eng. Start Not Possible in ..km ¯ Eng. Start Not Possible The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a Break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À Attention Assist Inoperative ë Off ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 183). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 183). Radar Sensors Deactivated See Operator's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 233). Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages 252 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Clean the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. Lane Keeping Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative or Activ e Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors are dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rfunction X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Clean the sensors (Y page 309). X Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative or Activ The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior e Blind Spot mirrors. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 188). Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages 254 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist Inoperative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers. Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 188). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 175). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175). DISTRONIC PLUS Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 309). X Restart the engine. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS Passive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175). Cruise Control Inoperative Cruise control is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control - - - mph A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 173). Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 256 Display messages Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 314). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 337). Check Tire Pressure Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since. Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 337). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 338). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 341). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 314). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 338). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 314). Ryou Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages 258 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily Currently malfunctioning. Unavailable X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. TirePress. Sensor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. to Start Engine X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Risk of Rolling Shift to 'P' You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop button while the transmission was not in position P. X Shift the transmission to position P. A The tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. X Close all the doors. Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 305). Check Washer Fluid Z 259 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 260 Display messages SmartKey Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  Take Your Key from Ignition  Obtain a New Key  Replace Key Battery  Don't Forget Your Key  Key Not Detected (red display message) The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 79). The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164) (Y page 164). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. Key Not Detected (white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X  Key Detected in Vehicle Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.  Close Doors to Lock Vehicle Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. After starting the engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58). belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58). warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out. after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat. or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The car is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 58). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The car is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J (Canada only) G WARNING The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident. while the engine is running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are therefore also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 263 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are therefore also deactivated, for example. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. RThe G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also unavailable, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) ÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also unavailable, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 265 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ä ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 70). The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® is deactivated. å ESP® The yellow OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while ® ® the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 70). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ÷äå ESP® The yellow and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 43). Z 267 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 268 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking. warning lamp flashes X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction while the vehicle is in display. motion. In addition, X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. the ; Check Engine X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler warning lamp may light cap. up. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station. warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is defective. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 269 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 270 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 304). Observe the warning notes. X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 304). Observe the warning notes. X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. Driving systems Problem · The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. There is a risk of an accident. X Increase the distance. · G WARNING The red distance You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line warning lamp lights up of travel at too high a speed. while the vehicle is in There is a risk of an accident. motion. A warning tone X Be prepared to brake immediately. also sounds. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72). Z 271 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 272 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Tires Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires. monitor warning lamp G WARNING (pressure loss/ With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the malfunction) is lit. following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 314). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 338). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 273 274 274 275 282 Stowage and features Useful information ............................ Loading guidelines ............................ Stowage areas .................................. Features ............................................. 274 Loading guidelines Useful information Stowage and features i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo. The gross load limit and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must never be exceeded. The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door (Y page 342). The load must also be distributed so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door (Y page 342). Further information can be found in the "Loading the vehicle" section (Y page 342). The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the cargo compartment as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. RHook in the cargo net (if installed) when loading. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage areas 275 Stowage areas Stowage space Important safety notes If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1. i The glove box can be ventilated (Y page 141). Stowage compartment under the armrest Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274). Stowage compartments in the front Glove box X To open: press left-hand button ; or righthand button :. The stowage compartment opens. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. USB connection and an AUX IN connection or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate Audio or COMAND Operating Instructions). The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. Z Stowage and features G WARNING Stowage areas 276 Stowage space in the rear Stowage compartment in the rear ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cover of the stowage Stowage and features compartment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest. level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity. Folding the rear seat backrest forward X X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. Stowage net Stowage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left-hand side of the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 275). Cargo compartment enlargement Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended X Fully insert the backrest head restraints (Y page 102). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forwards. Corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold backrest : forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Stowage areas Folding the rear seat backrest back 277 Only use the cargo tie down rings when securing a load. Observe the following notes on securing loads: : Backrest ; Lock verification indicator = Backrest release handle X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. X the loading guidelines (Y page 274). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. There are four cargo tie down rings in the cargo compartment and two in the rearcompartment footwells14. Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 102). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Securing cargo : Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment Cargo tie-down rings G WARNING The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes in direction or in the event of an accident. The load could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury. 14 Canada only. Z Stowage and features RObserve 278 Stowage areas Cargo compartment cover Important safety notes Stowage and features G WARNING : Cargo tie down rings in the rear- compartment footwell (Canada only) Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 11lbs (5kg) and should not be used to secure a load. There is one bag hook on the left side wall in the cargo compartment and there are two hooks on the right and left of the lower D-pillar trim. On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover. ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the cargo compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the cargo compartment cover. The cargo compartment cover is located behind the rear bench seat backrest. i You can fold up the solid section of the cargo compartment cover approximately 45° to facilitate loading the cargo compartment. Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover Stowage areas To extend: pull cargo compartment cover : back and clip it into the retainers on the left and right. X To retract: unhook cargo compartment cover : from the retainers on the left and right and guide it forwards by the grab handle until it is fully retracted. Installing/removing the cargo compartment cover is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo net. It is important to use a cargo net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo net when transporting loads. Preparing the cargo net The cargo net can be used in two different positions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar). X To remove: make sure that cargo compartment cover : is rolled up. X Press handle ; on the right underside to the left. X Remove cargo compartment cover :. X To install: attach cargo compartment cover : to the opening on the left-hand side. X Press handle ; to the left. X Allow cargo compartment cover : to engage in the appropriate recess. Cargo net Important safety notes G WARNING On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There RThe brackets behind B-pillar : are required for the cargo compartment enlargement (Y page 276). The corresponding cargo tie down rings to tighten the net are located in the footwell of the rear bench seat (Y page 277). RThe brackets behind C-pillar ; are required for the cargo compartment behind the rear bench seat. The corresponding cargo tie down rings to tension the net are located in the cargo compartment (Y page 277). The cargo net is located in the loading tray in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor (Y page 281). Z Stowage and features X 279 Stowage areas 280 X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the cargo net. X Unroll and unfold the cargo net. The upper and lower guide rods must engage audibly. Releasing the cargo net Stowage and features Attaching the cargo net Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats X Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar X Insert guide rod ; into retainer : in the direction of the arrow. X Slide guide rod ; forwards into retainer : in the direction of the arrow. Tightening the cargo net Pull belt adjuster : upwards in the direction of the arrow to reduce the tension on the tensioning strap. X Unhook belt hook ; from cargo tie-down ring =. Detaching and storing the cargo net X Detach guide rod ; from bracket : (Y page 280). X Press the red button on the upper and lower guide rods. X Fold the cargo net and roll it up. X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo net holder. Coat hooks on the tailgate Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats X Insert belt hook : into cargo tie-down ring ; in the direction of the arrow. X Pull tensioning strap = by the loose end in the direction of the arrow until the cargo net is tight. X After driving a short distance, check the tension of the cargo net and retighten it if necessary. : Coat hook Stowage areas 281 Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey. X Engage hook = into rain trough ?. i Stowage compartments A and B can be used to stow small, light and flat objects. ! Before you close the tailgate, unhook the hook from the rain trough and fold the trunk floor down. X X To open: open the tailgate. X Holding the ribbing, press handle : downwards ;. Handle : folds up. X Swing the cargo compartment floor upwards using handle : until it rests against the cargo compartment cover. To close: unhook hook = from rain trough ?. X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor. X Fold the trunk floor down. X Press the cargo compartment floor down until it engages. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING X Release hook = from the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor. When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Z Stowage and features G WARNING Features Stowage and features 282 This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier is installed. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. The maximum roof load is 165 lbs(75 kg). An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load could become detached from the vehicle. Therefore, always comply with the installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the roof carrier. Attaching the roof carrier X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Features Cup holder Important safety notes ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Cup holder in the front-compartment center console : Cup holder X Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back down, if necessary. X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X Sun visors Overview G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Features 283 Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X To open: slide cover : forwards. X To remove: open the cover of ashtray =. X Hold ashtray = at the sides and lift it up ; and out. X To re-install: press ashtray = into the holder until engages. X Close the lid of ashtray =. X To close: pull cover : back. Rear-compartment ashtray X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction of the arrow. Z Stowage and features not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Features 284 X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. X To remove the insert: press release button = and lift the insert up and out. X To install the insert: install insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: pull cover : back. Stowage and features 12 V sockets Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X To open: slide cover : forwards. General notes The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Socket in the front-compartment center console X To open: slide cover : forwards. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: pull cover : back. Features Socket in the rear-compartment center console 285 Only connect appropriate devices to the power socket. ! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V power socket should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel. X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. X Lift up the cover of socket :. 115 V power socket : provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, should not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether. Requirements for operation of these devices: Rthe 115 V socket Important safety notes G DANGER When a suitable device is connected, the 115 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. RUse only connector cables that are dry and free of damage. RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. RHave the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in. Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged into 115 V power socket :. Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts. Rthe on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range. Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and the cargo compartment are operational (Y page 284). Using the 115 V power socket G DANGER If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. X X To switch on: switch the ignition on. Open flap =. Z Stowage and features General notes Features 286 X Stowage and features Insert the plug of the electronic device into 115 V power socket :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X To switch off: remove the connector from 115 V socket :. Ensure that you do not pull on the cord. Features 287 Problems with the 115 V power socket Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the indicator lamp still does not light up: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high. X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket. X Let the DC/AC converter cool down. If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the converter: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. You have connected a small electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 W, but a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power. X Connect a suitable device. mbrace General notes You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Shortly after successfully registering with the service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. USA only: you can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Rthe i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. Rthe Z Stowage and features The warning lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak. the 115 V power socket X Start the engine. is not lit. or X Charge the battery (Y page 318). Features 288 The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or Stowage and features X Use the volume controller of the audio system/COMAND. The system offers various services, e.g: RAutomatic and manual emergency call Assistance call RMB Info call USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. RRoadside System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during selfdiagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoperative or Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 General notes An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call i You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) RVehicle identification number RInformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. i If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Z 289 Stowage and features Features Features 290 Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. Stowage and features i The system has not been able to initiate a roadside assistance call, if: Rthe X indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. Press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: X RCurrent MB Info call button RVehicle location of the vehicle identification number To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND. i The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 293). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- X Press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The multifunction display Features shows the Connecting Call message. The audio system is muted. X If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: or location of the vehicle RVehicle identification number i The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button on the audio system or on COMAND for ending a telephone call i When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Downloading destinations in COMAND Downloading destinations Destination Download gives you access to a data bank with over 15 million Points of Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/ important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to 20 way points. Z Stowage and features RCurrent X 291 292 Features You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. i If you select No, the address can be saved Stowage and features in the address book. i The destination download function is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. i The destination download function can only be used if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Search & Send "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. You can find further information on "Search & Send" in the separate COMAND operating instructions. Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, Blackberry) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible. Vehicle remote closing The remote closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed remotely. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at Features The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, Blackberry) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible. Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center is automatically informed. Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis With the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer Assistance center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance center. You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in the COMAND display. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display. X Confirm the message with Yes. X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please start ignition message appears, turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X When the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears, follow the customer service representative's instructions. The message in the display disappears. If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely. The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis activated. message. When the diagnosis is completed, the Send vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice connection may be//interrupted during data transfer) message appears. Z Stowage and features 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 You will be asked for your password. 293 Stowage and features 294 Features The vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center. X Press OK to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance center is terminated. You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferring data... message. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Further functions of the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis include, for example: Rtransfer of service data to the Customer Assistance center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop. Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, etc. If applicable, you will receive information on special offers in the e-mail. USA only: this information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 28). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 24). Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. To do this, an SD memory card must be inserted into the COMAND system. If no SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND system before saving. A route can be prepared and sent either by a customer service representative or via the mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can include up to 20 way points. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see thehas been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message in the COMAND display. The route is saved to the SD memory card. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. i If you select No, the saved route can be called up later via the navigation menu. X Select Start. Route guidance is started. i Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions. Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance center. The Customer Assistance center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Features Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. USA only: these settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message. Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Garage door opener Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and current U.S. federal safety standards When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Rmeet i Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programming the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. i Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 26). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Z Stowage and features Geo fencing 295 Features 296 Programming Stowage and features Programming buttons Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 295). Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not part of the integrated garage door opener. X The first time before programming, clear the integrated garage door opener memory (Y page 298). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programmed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). i The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. If indicator lamp : lights up green or flashes, then programming has been successful. X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rearview mirror. i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programming, the garage door system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage door system. Synchronizing the rolling code Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 295). Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the program button of the door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under "programming of additional remote controls"). Features initiate the next step. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the process. X Continue with the other programming steps (see above). Rif Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage door drive remote control A. This can usually be found on the back of the remote control. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280to 433MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button that you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Z Stowage and features i Usually, you now have 30seconds to 297 Features Stowage and features 298 Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. i The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green. i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. X Slide the seat backwards. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X 299 300 300 301 305 Maintenance and care Useful information ............................ ASSYST PLUS .................................... Engine compartment ........................ Care .................................................... 300 ASSYST PLUS Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all Maintenance and care models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X or X specialist workshops: (Y page 27). ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 302). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. Days A Due RService A Exceeded by ... Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RService Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages X Switch on the ignition. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and Engine compartment A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Engine compartment Hood Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment, Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rkeep clothing away from moving parts Rnever Z Maintenance and care damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. 301 Engine compartment 302 G WARNING X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Maintenance and care The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. Closing the hood X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. Engine oil General notes on the oil level Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. Engine compartment Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. X Park the vehicle on a level surface. To check the oil level with the engine at operating temperature, switch the engine off and wait for approximately five minutes. X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil. Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that Example: vehicles with a diesel engine have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and Z Maintenance and care When checking the oil level: 303 Engine compartment 304 approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Maintenance and care Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives. ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. Example: engine oil cap X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 303). Further information on engine oil (Y page 371). Checking and adding other service products Checking coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 145). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). Care 305 Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 372). Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system/headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 259). Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 373). Care General notes ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive Z Maintenance and care X 306 Care H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. Maintenance and care ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Exterior care Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. Rthe You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Care Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paintwork has become dull, then the paintwork should be cleaned. Use the cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Maintenance and care When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. 307 308 Care Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Maintenance and care Matte finish care Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. If your vehicle has a clear matte finish, observe the following instructions in order to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. Care ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Maintenance and care ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo. Or clean the exterior lighting with cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used as well. 309 X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. Z Care 310 Cleaning the exhaust pipes ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- Maintenance and care based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch H Environmental note Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Observe the note on care provided by the Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. trailer manufacturer. The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, e.g. with a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly grease the ball of the ball coupling again. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Care Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: RDifferences in the texture RSigns of stretching and marking RSlight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). RClean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry Z Maintenance and care X 311 Care 312 afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts Maintenance and care G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. 313 314 314 314 316 320 322 325 Breakdown assistance Useful information ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tire .............................................. Battery (vehicle) ................................ Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. Flat tire 314 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. Breakdown assistance i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). X Remove stowage tray : in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover ; in the direction of the arrow. Where will I find...? First-aid kit X Open the tailgate. = Lug wrench ? Towing eye A Jack B Fuse allocation chart X Remove first-aid kit : from the stowage net. i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing items. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. X To remove the cargo compartment stowage tray/cover: lift up the cargo compartment floor (Y page 281). C Wheel bolts D One pair of gloves E Ratchet wrench F Tire inflation compressor G Valve extractor H Folding wheel chock Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 315) Flat tire X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 145). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the loadbearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 348). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: RObserve the instructions in the display messages (Y page 256). RCheck the tire for damage. RIf driving on, observe the following notes. The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: RSpeed RRoad condition temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. ROutside Breakdown assistance Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires. RCollapsible spare wheel Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (Y page 361) Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 354). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. 315 316 Battery (vehicle) You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). i When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you use only tires: Rof the size specified for the vehicle and "MOExtended" If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Breakdown assistance Rmarked Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rbraking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 67) and (Y page 69). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jumpstarting. Battery (vehicle) Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. Breakdown assistance Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A buildup of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: 317 ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESSGO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Z 318 Battery (vehicle) Breakdown assistance Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by MercedesBenz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rset the clock; see the separate operating instructions. On vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically. Rreset the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. (Y page 94) Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 107)15. Charging the battery G WARNING Observe this Operator's Manual. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified 15 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Battery (vehicle) 319 Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING Breakdown assistance A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed in the vehicle. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 320). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 320). X Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Z 320 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. Breakdown assistance G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. ! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel. Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. Jump-starting 321 ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RMake Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X Apply the parking brake firmly. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. Z Breakdown assistance Rbare Towing and tow-starting 322 X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. G WARNING If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or towstarted is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 366). ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock and shift the automatic transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. Towing and tow-starting 323 The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Rcannot i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 82). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Breakdown assistance Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend to use the vehicle for towing, install the ball coupling and connect the towbar to it (Y page 214). X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 314). The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are under the covers at the front and at the rear on vehicles without a trailer coupling. On vehicles with a trailer coupling, the bracket is at the front under the cover. Vehicles without the AMG Sports package Vehicles with the AMG Sports package X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. Rear bumpers on vehicles with the AMG Sports package: lift up cover : from the bumper by inserting a round, blunt object into the recess. X Take cover : off the opening. X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Removing the towing eye X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. Z Towing and tow-starting 324 Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only possible for vehicles without 4MATIC. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 322). ! The ignition must be switched off if you Breakdown assistance are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 115). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. ! You may only secure the vehicle by the Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 322). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 115). i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 320). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Fuses ! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in a straight line when pulling out a vehicle that has become stuck. Excessive tractive power could damage the vehicles. If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the utmost care, especially so if the vehicle is laden. Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a trailer attached. Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, using the tracks it made when it became stuck. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. You can find information on "Jump-starting" at (Y page 320). components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before changing a fuse X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 145). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 145). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the cargo compartment floor (Y page 314). ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. Z Breakdown assistance Recovering a vehicle that has become stuck 325 Fuses 326 ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Breakdown assistance X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X To open: take lines ; from the guides. X Open clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bottom in the direction of arrow =. X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of arrow ; and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the hood. X To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X Close the hood. Fuse box in the cargo compartment ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Open the tailgate. Fuses 327 X Breakdown assistance To open: lift up cargo compartment floor ;(Y page 281). X Remove stowage compartment :. X Open cover = of fuse box downwards. Z 328 329 330 330 330 332 334 342 345 346 347 351 354 355 359 361 Wheels and tires Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tire pressure ..................................... Loading the vehicle .......................... Maximum load rating ....................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards .......................................... Tire labeling ....................................... Definition of terms for tires and loading ............................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Mounting a wheel ............................. Wheel and tire combinations ........... Emergency spare wheel ................... 330 Operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal Wheels and tires Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section (Y page 359). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tires can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary. RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires including the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 334). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 361). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. RRegularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: - cuts in the tires - punctures - tears in the tires - bulges on tires - deformation or severe corrosion on wheels RRegularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 331). If necessary, style pressure RDistance covered RTire Important safety notes on the tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer RM+S tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) Z 331 Wheels and tires Operation Wheels and tires 332 Winter operation For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 361). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 315). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter mounting new tires, break them in at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km), as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 315). Winter operation Points to remember Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 354). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter Winter operation At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 337). Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 337). X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 338). X For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 361). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. ! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels". ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish to mount snow chains on steel wheels, make sure that you remove the respective wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may otherwise be damaged. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 359). Ronly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). i You may wish to deactivate ESP®(Y page 70) when pulling away with snow chains installed. You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 361). Z Wheels and tires and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. 333 334 Tire pressure Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications applicable to your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on your vehicle. Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tires is the maximum tire pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Wheels and tires Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. 1.) Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 342). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. i The specifications given on the following Tire and Loading Information placard are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressures : Recommended tire pressures Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. i Specifications shown in the examples of tire pressure tables are for illustration purposes only. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. Tire pressure specifications applicable to your vehicle are located in your vehicle's tire pressure table. Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the Tire pressure table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. 335 the inside of the fuel filler flap is valid for the rear axle. Option 3) The tire pressure for the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) can be found: Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 348). in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel Rin the "Wheel and tire combinations" section (Y page 359) in this Operator's Manual Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. i For vehicles towing a trailer, the full load value on the tire pressure label located on If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Z Wheels and tires Rprinted 336 Tire pressure To test tire pressure, use a suitable tire pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Wheels and tires Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires and only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) Rin Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflation G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/ or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Rwear quickly and unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Roverheat, leading to tire defects an adverse effect on handling characteristics Rhave Overinflation G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rhave an adverse effect on handling characteristics Rwear quickly and unevenly Rbe more susceptible to damage Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rincrease the braking distance Maximum tire pressures Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the Tire pressure recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 334). 337 X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value (Y page 334). X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve using the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) pressure i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the "tire pressure information" section (Y page 334). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure information" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle. General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 338). Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 334). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Z Wheels and tires : Example: maximum permissible tire Tire pressure 338 event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Wheels and tires conditions are wintry. are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Tire Pressure menu. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. Rroad If you wish to confirm the restart: Ryou X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. Rchanged If you wish to cancel the restart: Rchanged X Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system the tire pressure the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side A tire pressure table is also affixed to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 334). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2(Y page 145) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. Press the % button. or X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel. X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Tire pressure monitor General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed on all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes Example: current tire pressure display For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 340). Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire 339 pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Wheels and tires of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Tire pressure It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 334). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 341). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 334). Z 340 Tire pressure The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Wheels and tires Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. i In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Further information can be found on (Y page 256). If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tire pressure electronically X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare tire is mounted is not the same as the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel's current tire pressure. Tire pressure X If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 256). RIf i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 334). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 334). Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Z Wheels and tires Tire pressure monitor warning messages 341 342 Loading the vehicle Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Wheels and tires Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. : B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible load i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible load is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The maximum permissible load that applies for your vehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard. X Specification for maximum permissible load : is listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the specified value. Number of seats i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to this Operator's Manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (Y page 345). Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on Z 343 Wheels and tires Loading the vehicle 344 Loading the vehicle Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 343). Step 1 Wheels and tires Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Maximum load rating Step 3 Permissible load and trailer load/ noseweight (maximum permissible load rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) = 960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) 345 Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 342). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Trailer load/noseweight The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of the gross weight of the trailer and its load. Maximum load rating Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 342). i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Z Wheels and tires The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 345). 346 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Wheels and tires Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: tread wear :, tire traction ; and heat resistance =. All tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality class mark on the sidewall of the tire, even though these regulations do not apply to Canada. i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Where applicable, the tire grading information can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. For example: Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter tires (Y page 332) to maintain normal driving characteristics in winter. Winter tires can Tire labeling 347 reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with ice or snow. Take appropriate care when driving. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. Temperature G WARNING The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 351) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 350) = Maximum tire load (Y page 345) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 336) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 351) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed index (Y page 348) D Load index (Y page 350) E Tire name i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling The following markings are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name: Z Wheels and tires The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. 348 Tire labeling Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating : Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code Wheels and tires ? Rim diameter A Load bearing index B Speed rating i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 342). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 345). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 350). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and Tire labeling Summer tires (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) All-weather tires and winter tires T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Index H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Q M+S16 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) T M+S16 W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) H M+S16 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) V M+S16 ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph 16 Or Speed rating up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding snow traction, and were specially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph (210km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating for your vehicle as specified in the "tires" section (Y page 359), e.g. if you buy new tires. Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. M+Si for winter tires. Z Wheels and tires adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. 349 350 Tire labeling Load index The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables tire manufacturers to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may Wheels and tires deviate from the data in the example. In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed rating B(Y page 348) on the sidewall of the tire. RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every manufacturer of new tires or retreader has to imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 330). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire characteristics 351 Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards deviate from the data in the example. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the United States Department of Transportation. Recommended tire pressure The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment This is the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. Z Wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. 352 Definition of terms for tires and loading GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. Wheels and tires GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) The GTW is the weight of a trailer including the weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on the trailer. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the total load limit and the weight of the optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum load rating in kilograms or pounds is the maximum weight for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Definition of terms for tires and loading Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Tire pressure of cold tires The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a highperformance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) The TWR specifies the maximum permissible weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch can support. The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Z Wheels and tires Maximum load on one tire 353 354 Changing a wheel Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Wheels and tires Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Flat tire You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section (Y page 314). Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 315). Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 355). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressures. Information on changing tires and mounting the spare wheel (Y page 354). Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is maintained. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Mounting a wheel Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. X 355 Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Cleaning the wheels The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Move the selector lever to position P. X Switch off the engine. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 314). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 145). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Z Wheels and tires G WARNING Mounting a wheel 356 Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Wheels and tires Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm). Rnever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Mounting a wheel X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Position jack = at jacking point ;. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a The jacking points are located just behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and just in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels (arrows). X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible. dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X X Unscrew the wheel bolts. Remove the wheel. Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel Z Wheels and tires X 357 358 Mounting a wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Be sure to use the original-length wheel bolts when re-mounting the original wheel after it has been repaired. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. G WARNING Wheels and tires If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 354). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Inflate the collapsible spare wheel (Y page 362). Only then lower the vehicle. Lowering the vehicle G WARNING : Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the factory ; Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel ! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the collapsible spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the collapsible spare wheel could damage the brake system. The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. Wheel and tire combinations 359 These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it together with the rest of the tirechange tool kit in the cargo compartment. X Transport the faulty wheel in the cargo compartment. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 334). For further information on stowing the collapsible spare wheel, see (Y page 363). i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. i The recommended pressures for various Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Z Wheels and tires RMO1 360 Wheel and tire combinations Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 334). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Wheels and tires i On the following pages, you can find information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The size of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. i Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle RFA: In the following table, the wheel/tire combinations are assigned to the vehicle models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.: V1 GLK 250 BlueTEC, GLK 350, GLK 350 4MATIC i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. Emergency spare wheel 361 Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 FA 235/50 R 19 99 V17 # RA 255/45 R 19 100 V17, 18 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm) All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+S17 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm) # BA 235/50 R19 99 H M+S17 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) # BA 235/50 R19 99 H M+S MOExtended19 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) # BA 235/45 R20 100 H XL M+S17 8.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm) # All-terrain tires Alloy wheels V1 235/60 R17 102 H M+S17 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm) # Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 235/60 R17 102 H M+Si17 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm) # BA BA Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. 17 USA: not for GLK 250 BlueTEC. of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 19 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. 18 Use Z Wheels and tires Tires 362 Emergency spare wheel Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly. not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct. Rdo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. Collapsible spare wheel Removing the collapsible emergency spare wheel The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. X Lift the cargo compartment floor up (Y page 281). Wheels and tires General notes You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 334). The applicable value is found on the wheel or under "Technical data" (Y page 359). i When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system/the tire pressure monitor when the damaged wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. X Remove stowage compartment :. Turn retaining screw ; counter-clockwise and remove it. X Remove collapsible spare wheel =. X Take the wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel from the vehicle tool kit. X For further information on changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel, see (Y page 314). Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. Emergency spare wheel 363 X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter (Y page 284) or into a 12 V power socket (Y page 284) in your vehicle. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1(Y page 145) in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure. The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off. Stowing a used collapsible spare wheel Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collapsible spare wheel will not fit in the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. X Remove the valve extractor from the vehicle tool kit. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. i Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes. X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. Screw the valve cap back on. X Place the valve extractor back into the vehicle tool kit. X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the cargo compartment and fasten in place. X Z Wheels and tires X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tire pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again. X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing. X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle. 364 Emergency spare wheel Technical data Collapsible emergency spare wheel20 Tires Wheels V1 185/75 – 17 98 P Tire pressure: 280 kPa (2.8 bar/41 psi) 6.0 B x 17 H2 ET 25 # Wheels and tires i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. 20 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains. 365 366 366 366 366 367 375 375 376 Technical data Useful information ............................ Information regarding technical data .................................................... Warranty ............................................ Identification plates ......................... Service products and filling capacities ..................................................... Vehicle data ...................................... Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... Trailer tow hitch ................................ 366 Identification plates Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i If you lose the Service and Warranty Information booklet, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a replacement. It will be mailed to you. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Information regarding technical data General information Technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Warranty Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon Laws) REmission X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Service products and filling capacities 367 X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see VIN ;. The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Ron Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 367) Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 366) Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; Paint code = VIN : Emission control information plate, i The data shown on the identification plate including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. VIN Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. Z Technical data Engine number 368 Service products and filling capacities H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: Technical data RFuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel) RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing, and disposing of service fluids. Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about tested and approved products can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Tank capacity Model RMB Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. All models Total capacity 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Model Of which reserve All models Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Service products and filling capacities Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized MercedesBenz Center. RE100 ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premiumgrade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard premium-grade unleaded gasoline is unavailable and unleaded gasoline of a lower grade is used for refueling, observe the following precautions: Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds above 3000 rpm. Rnever refuel using fuel with an octane number lower than 87. Otherwise, engine failure could occur. Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Information on refueling (Y page 158). Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have the additives. Z Technical data Gasoline 369 370 Service products and filling capacities The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized MercedesBenz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Diesel Fuel grade G WARNING Technical data If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. ! Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm maximum sulfur content) that meets the ASTM D975 standard. If you do not refuel with ULSD, you may damage the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system of the vehicle. ! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel with gasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This may otherwise result in damage to the fuel system and engine. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Information on refueling (Y page 158). Bio-diesel - FAME (fatty acid methyl ester) Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of biodiesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may not exceed 5% by volume. Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can damage the engine and the fuel system. For this reason, they are not approved. For more information, consult the gas station staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline pump must clearly state that the standard for ULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is not clear, do not refuel the vehicle. Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on refueling (Y page 159). Low outside temperatures i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow properties is available during the winter months. Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas stations. DEF Important safety notes Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling DEF (Y page 367). DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnot poisonous and odorless Rnot flammable When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible. Rcolorless Service products and filling capacities Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas. Low outside temperatures Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a Additives ! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. Purity ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: Rincreased emission values to the catalytic converter Rengine damage Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system Rdamage Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned to the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed. specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 367). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model Engine model MB Approval GLK 350 GLK 350 4MATIC 276 229.5 GLK 250 BlueTEC 651 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 Filling capacities GLK 250 BlueTEC Total capacity 7.3 US gal (27.5 l) i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Z Technical data DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with a DEF preheating system. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even at temperatures below 12 ‡ (-11 †). Model 371 372 Service products and filling capacities Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model All models Capacity 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 367). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Technical data i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The lowtemperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at Service products and filling capacities ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 367). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Filling capacities Model Capacity GLK 350 GLK 350 4MATIC Approx. 8.9 US qt (8.4 l) GLK 250 BlueTEC Approx. 10.4 US qt (9.8 l) i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze. Windshield washer system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 367). Z Technical data http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. 373 Service products and filling capacities 374 At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Refrigerant instruction label At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. Technical data RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water. Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB ? PAG oil part number SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R-134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. ! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable SAE standards A Type of refrigerant Warning symbols : indicate: Rpossible dangers it is necessary to have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Rthat Filling capacities Missing values were not available at time of going to print. All models Capacity Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz (590 ± 10 g) PAG oil 4.2 oz (120 g) Vehicle data for off-road driving 375 Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. All models Vehicle length 178.6 in (4536 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.4 in (2016 mm) Wheelbase 108.5 in (2755 mm) Turning radius Maximum roof load 38.2 ft (11.65 m) 165 lb (75 kg) GLK 250 BlueTEC Vehicle height Ground clearance 66.7 in (1694 mm) 8.0 in (204 mm) GLK 350 GLK 350 4MATIC Vehicle height Ground clearance Model : Opening height ; Max. headroom GLK 250 BlueTEC 82.2 in 77.0 in (2087 mm) (1955 mm) All other models 82.1 in 76.9 in (2086 mm) (1954 mm) 66.7 in (1693 mm) 8.2 in (208 mm) Vehicle data for off-road driving Fording depth Fording depth : must not exceed 12 in (30 cm). For more information about off-road fording, see (Y page 170). Z Technical data Dimensions and weights 376 Trailer tow hitch Approach/departure angle Front approach/departure angle : is a maximum of 22.5° and rear approach/ departure angle ; is a maximum of 24.3°. For further information about approach/ departure angles, see (Y page 173). Technical data Maximum gradient-climbing capability Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road conditions and the road surface conditions. The maximum gradient climbing capability is 70%. i If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque is increased, making it easier to drive off. For further information about the maximum gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 173). Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system and drive train may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. 21 At Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (example) : Anchorage points ; Rear axle center line Trailer loads Missing values were not available at time of going to print. All models Permissible trailer load, unbraked Permissible trailer load, braked21 3500 lbs (1588 kg) Maximum drawbar noseweight22 280 lbs (127 kg) Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer 3108 lbs (1410 kg) The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill. drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. 22 The Trailer tow hitch 377 Technical data identification plates. The lowest weight applies. The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which the trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings. Z 378 379 380 Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 31.10.2012 É2045844383ÌËÍ 2045844383 Order no. 6515080213 Part no. 2045844383 Edition A 2014 Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract Page Count : 384 Page Mode : UseOutlines Language : EN Title : ÿþy Author : Owner: y.io.creator Keywords : Stylesheet-Version, 3.7.5.1, (SAXON, 8.9, from, Saxonica) Creator : XSL Formatter V4.3 MR8a (4,3,2009,0731) for Windows Producer : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows) Create Date : 2013:02:04 09:25:30+01:00 Modify Date : 2013:02:04 09:25:30+01:00EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools